Buffalo Wild Wings

freeplotting.com

Buffalo Wild Wings

P R O J E C T M A N U A L

FOR

Buffalo Wild Wings

at

Metrocenter

10402 North Black Canyon Highway

Phoenix, Arizona 85051-1506

Prototype V3.11.1

Issue Date: June 24, 2011

Project No.: 110100.001


Buffalo Wild Wings – Metrocenter – Phoenix, AZ

SECTION 00001 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE

PROJECT TITLE:

OWNER:

LANDLORD / DEVELOPER:

ARCHITECT:

CIVIL & LANDSCAPE:

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:

M.E.P. ENGINEER:

BUFFALO WILD WING GRILL & BAR

10402 North Black Canyon Highway

Phoenix, Arizona 85051-1506

BUFFALO WILD WINGS GRILL & BAR

5500 Wayzata Blvd., Suite 1600

Minneapolis, MN 55416

Leslie Ohara

(817) 937-5860

Embree Asset Group, Inc.

10777 Spur Point Ct.

San Diego, CA 92130

(858) 481-4838 office

(858) 481-4056 fax

David Church

(858) 354-0007 cell

dchurch@embreegroup.com

GHA Architecture / Development

14110 Dallas Parkway; Suite 300

Dallas, Texas 75254

(972) 239-8884 office

Alan Timmons

atimmons@gha-architects.com

GREENBERGFARROW

1600 North 80 th Street; Suite A

Scottsdale, AZ 85260

(602) 633-5290 office

Kevin Parker

kparker@greenbergfarrow.com

Ronald A. Roberts Associates, Inc.

2948 N. Stemmons Freeway

Dallas, Texas 75247-6103

(214) 637-6299 office

Matthew Betsill

mbetsill@rara.net

Michael Bryan Chadwick

11938 Nichole Lane

Forney, Texas 75126-7027

(972) 850-3228 office * (972-850-3229 fax

Bryan Chadwick

bchadwick@bcjengineers.com

ISSUE DATE: June 24th 2011

END OF PROJECT TITLE PAGE

04-27-11 PROJECT TITLE PAGE

00001 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 00010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

DOCUMENTS 0 -- INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION, BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, AND

CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

00001 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE

00010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

00011 - MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION LIST

00100 - BID SOLICITATION

00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00220 - SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION

00221 - SITE SPECIFIC SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT

00400 - BID FORM

00500 - AGREEMENT

DIVISION 1 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01100 - SUMMARY OF WORK

01200 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01300 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

01620 - REFERENCES

01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 2 -- SITE CONSTRUCTION

02360 - SOIL TREATMENT

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03351 - CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

04065 - MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT

04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04-27-11 TABLE OF CONTENTS

00010 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

DIVISION 5 – METALS

05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

05210 - STEEL JOISTS

05310 - STEEL DECK

05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 6 -- WOOD AND PLASTICS

06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY

06410 - CUSTOM CABINETS

06415 - COUNTERTOPS

06605 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS

DIVISION 7 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07100 - SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING

07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

07212 - BOARD AND BATT INSULATION

07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

07260 - AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS

07411 - PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS

07424 - ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM

07535 - MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING

07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

07900 - JOINT SEALERS

DIVISION 8 -- DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08310 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

08380 - TRAFFIC DOORS

08410 - METAL FRAMED STOREFRONTS

08710 - DOOR HARDWARE

08800 - GLAZING

04-27-11 TABLE OF CONTENTS

00010 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER, STUCCO

09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

09300 - TILE

09511 - SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING

09666 - SPECIALTY FLOORING

09680 - CARPET

09720 - WALL COVERING

09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS

DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES

10010 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

10210 - WALL LOUVERS

10263 - CORNER GUARDS

10445 - DOOR AND ROOM SIGNS

10500 - LOCKERS

10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES

10536 - AWNINGS

10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES

DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT - Not used, Refer to Drawings

DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS

12493 - WINDOW SHADES

DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - Not used

DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING SYSTEMS - Not used

04-27-11 TABLE OF CONTENTS

00010 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

DIVISION 15 -- MECHANICAL

15010 - MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS

15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

15150 - PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS

15200 - INSULATION

15300 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (PERFORMANCE BASED)

15400 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

15700 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

15800 - DUCTWORK MATERIALS AND METHODS

15976 - AUTOMATIC CONTROL SEQUENCE

15990 - TESTING AND BALANCING

DIVISION 16 -- ELECTRICAL

16010 - GENERAL CONDITIONS

16030 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

16050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

16111 - CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

16112 - OUTLET BOXES

16113 - PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

16117 - SAFETY SWITCHES

16118 - FUSES

16120 - WIRE AND CABLE

16140 - WIRING DEVICES

16150 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

16450 - GROUNDING SYSTEM

16470 - PANELBOARDS

16500 - LIGHTING

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

04-27-11 TABLE OF CONTENTS

00010 -4


Material Identification Codes

for use on Drawings and within Specifications

Overview

The Material Identification Codes List is intended to be a tool to improve the coordination and

naming conventions between Drawings and Specifications. The Material Identification Codes

List is organized by CSI MasterFormat Specification Section numbers.

These Material Identification Codes are indicated with the material and product choices

currently available in the Buffalo Wild Wings Master Specification.

Material Identification Codes List 04-27-11

00011-1


DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

Indicated on Drawings as:

(CONC1): Unexposed Form Finish, (Rough "as cast"), typical unless otherwise

indicated.

(CONC2): Interior Concrete Slabs, Steel trowel (smooth).

(CONC3): Exterior Horizontal Concrete Surfaces, Float finish, Heavy broom.

(Vapor Retarder): Underslab, 10mil thick multi-layer plastic sheet.

SECTION 03351 - CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER

Indicated on Drawings as: (SC) Sealed Concrete

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

(SC): Water based, concrete hardener / sealer. Exterior horizontal concrete surfaces.

SECTION 04065 – MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT

Indicated on Drawings as:

(Mortar): Portland cement lime mortar, masonry cement not allowed.

Mortar Colors:

1. LaFarge North America; “Santan”; color to match (FBR1) Face Brick. Refer to

Section 04810.

2. Spec Mix; Color No. LM-9327-50 #930; color to match (CMU2) Rock Face

Block. Refer to Section 04810.

Mortar Locations:

1. Locations of colored mortar: Used to match Face Brick and Rock Faced Block

Units.

2. Natural colored mortar for all other locations.

(Grout): 3000psi grout.

SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

Indicated on Drawings as:

Concrete Masonry Units

Face Brick Units

(CMU1): Normal weight hollow concrete masonry units.

(CMU2): Normal weight, Integral colored, Rock Face concrete masonry units.

1. Manufacturers: Amcon Block and Precast, Inc., St. Cloud, MN 56304.

Tel: 888-251-6030. www.amconblock.com

2. Color: Custom BWW Blend # RF-526.

(FBR): Type FBS, Grade SW brick units.

1. Size: 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.

2. Manufacturers: Sioux City Brick and Tile Company, Sioux City, Iowa 51102.

Tel: 712-258-7571. www.siouxcitybrick.com

3. Color: Toasted Fine Art Velour.

Block and Brick Coursing: Running Bond, 3/8” concave joints.

Material Identification Codes List 04-27-11

00011-2


Accessories for Section 04810

DIVISION 5 - METALS

(Joint Reinforcement): Single Wythe, truss type, hot dip galvanized.

(Wall Ties): Corrugated formed sheet metal, 7/8 inch wide, hot dip galvanized.

(Masonry Veneer Anchors): 2-piece, triangular shape, hot dip galvanized.

(Thru-Wall Flashing): Laminated asphalt impregnated cloth over 3 ounce copper core.

(Building Paper): No. 15 asphalt felt.

(Weeps): Cotton Rope.

(Cavity Mortar Diverter): Semi rigid polyethylene mesh.

SECTION 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

Indicated on Drawings as: Indicate stud and joist sizes and maximum spacing on Drawings.

(Stl Studs): Structural Steel Studs.

(Stl Joists): Structural Steel Joists.

(Sill Sealer): 1/4” thick, close cell polyethylene.

Exterior Wall Sheathing: Refer to Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry for wall sheathing.

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS

Miscellaneous steel shapes, plates and other metal fabrications:

(Stl Angles)

(Stl Channels)

(Loose Lintel)

(Stl Plate)

(Stl Tube)

(Stl Ladder): Steel ladders for roof access.

(Stl Bollards): Exterior bollards.

(SSTL): Stainless Steel Components

DIVISION 6 - WOODS AND PLASTICS

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

Indicated on Drawings as:

Dimensional Framing Lumber and Wood Blocking

(WD FRAMING): Wood framing lumber.

(WD BLKG): Exposed or concealed wood blocking.

Construction Plywood and Sheathing

(SHTG-1): Wall Sheathing:

1. Plywood Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 1, C-D, exposure 1, structural 1. 1/2"

nominal thickness. - Or -

2. Oriented Strand Board Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 2, exposure 1, structural 1.

1/2" nominal thickness.

(SHTG-2): Plywood Roof Sheathing: DOC PS 1, C-D, exterior, structural 1; 3/4" nominal

thickness. Tongue and Groove.

(SHTG-3): Concealed Plywood: DOC PS 1, C-C Plugged, exposure 1. Thickness as

indicated on drawings.

(SHTG-4): Exposed Plywood: DOC PS 1, A-D, interior grade. Thickness as

indicated on drawings.

(SHTG-5): Electrical Panel Boards: APA rated sheathing, fire retardant treated. 3/4”

nominal thickness.

Material Identification Codes List 04-27-11

00011-3


Treated Wood Material

(PT): Preservative treated wood materials.

(FT): Fire retardant treated wood materials.

Fiber Cement Siding and Trim

(Fiber Cement Siding): 5/16” thick, vertical siding panels, smooth texture.

(Fiber Cement Soffit): 1/4" thick, soffit panel, smooth texture.

(Fiber Cement Trim): 1” thick, trim boards, width as indicated, smooth texture.

Membrane Underlayment: 40 mil. thick, self-adhering sheet underlayment at Entry Canopy.

SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY

Indicated on Drawings as:

Items furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor:

(WD1): White Maple, transparent finish.

(WD2): Southern Pine.

Factory Finished Millwork: WIC Manual of Millwork, Section 5, System #5 - Catalyzed

Polyurethane, Clear.

Accessories for Section 06200

(Adjustable Shelf Brackets): Brackets and standards, white finish.

SECTION 06410 – CUSTOM CABINETS

Items furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor:

(WD1): White Maple, transparent finish.

Plastic Laminate

(PLAM1): Wilsonart # 1573-60, Frosty White, Matte.

(PLAM3): Wilsonart # 1595-60, Black, Matte

Accessories for Section 06410

(Grommet): Power cord grommet, 3” diameter.

SECTION 06415 - COUNTERTOPS

Indicated on Drawings as:

Plastic Laminate

Solid Surface

(PLAM2): Wilsonart # 4884-38, Flame Soapstone, Standard finish.

(SS1): Corian, Custom BWW color, #PDR AMG24-06-D.

Material Identification Codes List 04-27-11

00011-4


SECTION 06605 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS

Indicated on Drawings as:

FRP Adhesive

Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels (FRP): 0.090 inch thick, USDA approved, textured

surface wall panels with Class III/Class C fire rating.

(FRP1): White.

(FRP2): Black.

Franklin International; Titebond Solvent-Based FRP Adhesive.

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 07100 - SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING (Optional)

Indicated on Drawings as:

(Waterproofing): 60 mil. Thick, Self-Adhering, Sheet Membrane Waterproofing.

(i.e. Bituthene 3000)

(Protection Board): 1/4 thick, fan folded extruded-polystyrene board.

SECTION 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

Indicated on Drawings as:

(Dampproofing): Emulsified Bituminous Dampproofing, Non-fibered, water-based,

non-sag asphaltic coating designed for spray application.

(Protection Board): 1/4 thick, fan folded extruded-polystyrene board.

SECTION 07212 – BOARD AND BATT INSULATION

Indicated on Drawings as: (INSUL#)

(INSUL1): Unfaced fiberglass batt insulation.

(INSUL2): Under Slab and Foundation Insulation, Extruded Polystyrene Board

(INSUL3): Roof Insulation, Polyisocyanurate board with organic/inorganic facers.

SECTION 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

Indicated on Drawings as: (EIFS#)

(EIFS1) Key Note 18: Color: # 401, “Pretzel”.

(EIFS2) Key Note 19: Color: Color to Match Sherwin Williams Color # SW6898,

“Social Butterfly”, (C13).

(EIFS3) Key Note 20: Color: # 714, “Licorice”.

(EIFS4) Key Note 21: Color: # 310, “China White”.

Finish: “Sandpebble” finish on all colors.

SECTION 07260 – AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS

Indicated on Drawings as:

(Air Barrier): DuPont Tyvek.

Material Identification Codes List 04-27-11

00011-5


SECTION 07411 – PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS

Indicated on Drawings as:

(Standing Seam Metal Roof): 24 gauge, galvanized steel panels, 12 inch wide. Kynar

finish, Color: Matte Black.

SECTION 07424 - ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM

Indicated on Drawings as:

(Aluminum Composite Panels): 4mm composite panel with 3-coat, Kynar finish.

Color: Una-Clad “Silver Metallic”. Rout and Return wet

joint system.

SECTION 07535 – MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING

Indicated on Drawings as

(Membrane Roofing System): Mechanically attached thermoplastic sheet, .040 inch

thick. FM Class A and I-60 wind resistance.

SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

Indicated on Drawings as: (SHT MET#)

(SHT MET1): Prefinished galvanized steel, kynar coated. Color: Una-Clad “Silver Metallic”.

(SHT MET2): Standard galvanized flashing.

(Reglets): Manufactured reglets, surface mounted and recessed.

SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

Indicated on Drawings as:

(Roof Hatch): Roof hatch for vertical ladder locations (2'-6" by 3'-0"), Bilco Type S

Roof Hatch.

SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS

Indicated on Drawings as: (SLNT)

(SLNT1): General Purpose Exterior Sealant, 1 part, polyurethane.

(SLNT2): General Purpose Interior Sealant, acrylic.

(SLNT3): Sanitary/Tile Sealant, 1 part , mildew resistant silicone.

(SLNT4): Concrete Paving Joint Sealant, 2 part, self-leveling polyurethane for traffic.

(SLNT5): Butyl Sealant.

(SLNT6): Low modulus Silicone Sealant, 1 part, general purpose silicone.

(SLNT7): Ultra-Low Modulus Silicone Sealant, 1 part, silicone.

Sealant Schedule - Sealant types will be scheduled within the project manual as follows:

(SLNT1): General Purpose Exterior Sealant, use for:

a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.

b. Joints between concrete and other materials.

c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.

d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.

(SLNT2): General Purpose Interior Sealant, use for:

a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.

b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.

c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.

Material Identification Codes List 04-27-11

00011-6


(SLNT3): Sanitary/Tile Sealant, use for:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.

b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces.

c. Control joints in tile installations in toilet rooms and kitchen.

(SLNT4): Concrete Paving Joint Sealant use for:

a. Joints in concrete sidewalks and vehicular paving.

(SLNT5): Butyl Sealant, use for:

a. Seam sealant for masonry flashing.

b. Bedding sealant for thresholds and sills.

(SLNT6): Low modulus Silicone Sealant, use for:

a. Air barrier perimeter.

b. Exterior sheet metal joints.

(SLNT7): Ultra-Low Modulus Silicone Sealant, use for:

a. Perimeter and internal joints in EIFS System.

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

SECTION 08110 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

Indicated on Drawings as:

(HM Frames): 14 gauge galvanized for Exterior Frames. 14 gauge for Traffic Door

Frames. 16 gauge for Interior Frames.

(HM Doors): 16 gauge galvanized with polystyrene core for Exterior Doors. 16 gauge

with honeycomb core for Interior Doors.

SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

Indicated on Drawings as:

(Wood Doors): Interior 1-3/4” Solid-Core Doors with Plain Sliced, Select White Maple

veneers.

Finish (PS19): Transparent finished doors field finished under Section 09900 - Paints

and Coatings.

SECTION 08310 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

Indicated on Drawings as:

(AP) Access Panel: Access panels for drywall, EIFS and composite panel soffit locations.

SECTION 08380 - TRAFFIC DOORS

Indicated on Drawings as:

(TD): Chase Model # SC-3018, Plastic laminate both sides, 18” s.s. impact plate

and 9” x 14” acrylic vision panel.

Plastic Laminate Colors:

Black: Formica Black 909-58, Dining/Public side of door.

White: Formica White 949-58, Kitchen side of door.

Material Identification Codes List 04-27-11

00011-7


SECTION 08410 – METAL FRAMED STOREFRONTS

Indicated on Drawings as:

(Aluminum Storefront & Window Framing): 2” x 4-1/2”, thermally broken, center glazed

to accept 1/4" and 1” insulated glass. Clear Anodized Finish.

(Aluminum Doors): 1-3/4 thick, medium stile aluminum doors.

Aluminum Door Hardware: All Hardware specified except Cylinders and Door Stops.

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE

Indicated within the Hardware Groups and on the Door Schedule

Manufacturers

Hardware Supplier

Hinges: PBB.

Lock and Latch Sets; Schlage; ND Series. Cylinders: Schlage.

Exit Alarm Locks: Von Duprin; Guard – X.

Panic Exit Devices: Detex; Value Series.

Push/Pull Sets; Kick Plates/Armor Plates: Hiawatha.

Closers: LCN.

Flush Bolts; Coat Hooks; Hinge Pin Stops; Door Viewers: Ives.

Wall Stops: Don-Jo Manufacturing.

Weatherstripping; Sill Sweep; Thresholds; Rain Drips: Reese.

Twin City Hardware: Brent Chuhel; 651-731-7126; bchuhel@tchco.com

HARDWARE GROUPS

Hardware Furnished by Section 08410 – Metal Framed Storefronts

GROUP 1: Interior Entry Vestibule Doors – Door No. 02

GROUP 2: Exterior Entry and Dining “B” (Patio) Doors – Door Nos. 01 and 15

GROUP 14: Single Aluminum Bar (Patio) Door – Door No. 19

Note: TCH to provide Door Stops for Group 1 & Cylinders and Door Stops for Group 2 & 14

Hardware Furnished by TCH

GROUP 3: Restroom Doors – Door Nos. 03 and 07

GROUP 4: Office – Door No. 10

GROUP 5: Not Used / Storage Closet

GROUP 6: Exterior Service Doors - Door Nos. 11 and 14

GROUP 7: Restroom Stall Doors – Door Nos. 4, 5, 6, and 8

GROUP 8: Rear Vestibule (Interior) - Door No. 13

GROUP 9: Mechanical Room – Door No. 18

GROUP 10: Patio Gates – Door Nos. 16 and 17

GROUP 11: Traffic Doors – Door Nos. 9 and 12

GROUP 12: Coat Hooks – Bar Stool Area

Hardware Furnished by Owner

GROUP 13: Padlocks – Keg Storage, Trash & Chemical Enclosure & Roof Hatch

Material Identification Codes List 04-27-11

00011-8


SECTION 08800 - GLAZING

Indicated on Drawings as:

Monolithic Glass

Insulated Glass

(GL1): Clear tempered glass, 1/4".

(GL2): Clear insulated unit, heat strengthened/tempered, 1/4"/1/2"/1/4". Low E coating

on No. 2 surface.

Insulated Spandrel Units

Unframed Mirrors

Tinted Window Film

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

(GL3): Clear insulated unit, heat strengthened, 1/4" (clear/frit)/1/2"/1/4" (clear).

Ceramic frit on No. 2 surface. Frit color: Black.

(GL4): Standard tempered glass mirror, 1/4”.

(GL5): One-way mirror glass, 1/4”. Provided by Section 08110.

(TF1): 3M Sun Control Window Film, Prestige Series, PR 70.

SECTION 09220 – PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER

Indicated on Drawings as: (PLS-##)

(Stucco): Exterior portland cement plaster on metal lath.

SECTION 09260 – GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

Indicated on Drawings as: (GYB-#)

(GYB1): Not Used.

(GYB2): 5/8" Mold and Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board.

Cement Backer Board

(GYB5): 5/8" Portland Cement Panels, USG Corporation: Durock.

Metal Framing Systems (interior non-load bearing)

(Metal Studs): Non-Loadbearing framing.

(Ceiling Channels): 2-1/2”, 20 gauge ceiling channels.

(Furring Channels): 7/8” Hat-shaped furring channels.

Gypsum Board Accessories and Trim Pieces

(Sheet Metal Backing)

(Corner Bead)

(CJ): Control Joint.

(EJ): Expansion Joint.

Gypsum Board Finish Level Schedule

Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view.

Level 2: Utility areas and areas behind cabinetry.

Level 4: Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive paint finish.

Material Identification Codes List 04-27-11

00011-9


SECTION 09300 - TILE

Ceramic Tile

Indicated on Drawings as:

(CT1): 12” x 12” Floor and Wall Tile, Back Bay Iron Range,

RBC # EQCP96-1212, Sparta.

(CT2): 6” x 12” Cove Base Tile, BWW Super Black Textured,

RBC # BW9235-COVE12, Black.

(CT2a): 1” x 6” Cove Base Outcorner, BWW Super Black Textured,

RBC # BW9235-COVE12OC, Black.

(CT3): 4” x 4” Black Accent Tile, Back Bay BWW Accent #1, RBC # BB10890-44,

Black.

(CT4): 4” x 4” Yellow Accent Tile, Back Bay BWW Accent #2, RBC # BB10380-44,

Yellow.

(T2) Trim: Schluter Systems, Reno-TK; Finish: Brushed Aluminum. Use w/ carpet and tile.

(T3) Trim: Schluter Systems, Rondec RO 80 EB, brushed stainless. Use w/ tile in restrooms.

(Waterproof Membrane System): Laticrete: 9235 or Hydroment Black Top 90210.

Quarry Tile

Indicated on Drawings as:

(QT1): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile with abrasive surface, RBC # OT10A-66, Red.

(QT2): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Base, RBC # 10-Q3565, Red.

(QT2a): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Right Corner, RBC # 10-QCR3565, Red.

(QT2b): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Left Corner, RBC # 10-QCL3565, Red.

SECTION 09511 – SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

Indicated on Drawings as: (ACT-#)

(ACT1): 24 x 48, Vinyl faced gypsum board, White. USG ClimaPlus Vinyl, Stipple 3270.

(ACT2): 24 x 24, Vinyl faced gypsum board, White. USG ClimaPlus Vinyl, Stipple 3260.

(ACT3): 24 x 24, Mineral fiber, White. USG, Radar ClimaPlus 2210.

(ACT4): 24 x 24, Mineral fiber, Flat Black. USG, Radar ClimaPlus 2210.

(GRID1): 15/16" Light Duty, aluminum grid system. USG; Donn AX Suspension System.

for (ACT1) and (ACT2).

(GRID2): 15/16" Intermediate Duty, galvanized steel grid system. USG; Donn DX/DXL

Double Web Grid System, for (ACT3) and (ACT4).

(Egg Crate Ceiling Panel): 1/2” x 1/2" x 3/8” thick, styrene plastic egg crate panel. 24” x

24” panel, Color Black.

SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING

Indicated on Drawings as:

Resilient Base

(RB) 6 inch base, Coved, Color Black.

SECTION 09666 - SPECIALTY FLOORING

Indicated on Drawings as:

(SPFL): 1/4” thick, vinyl flooring with heat welded seams and coved base, Light Gray.

(Cove Base Cap): Aluminum “Z” cove base cap.

SECTION 09680 - CARPET

Indicated on Drawings as: (CPT-#)

(CPT1): Custom Mohawk, Broadloom, BWW 50545-37907.

(Carpet Base): Mohawk, Broadloom, Spectrum V, BC246; Color: XJ7234, Black.

6” high.

Material Identification Codes List 04-27-11

00011-10


SECTION 09720 - WALL COVERINGS

Indicated on Drawings as: (WC-#)

(WC1): Forbo Marmoleum, Linoleum Wall Covering, Pattern: Real, Color: #2939,Black.

(T4) Trim: Corner Guard; 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x length as required, PVC corner guard.

SECTION 09900 – PAINTS AND COATINGS

Indicated on Drawings as:

Color Indicators

Substrates

(PS#) = Paint System: Prime and Topcoat on Substrate

(C#) = Color Number: Color and Sheen

Example: (PS1/C2) = Paint System and Color

All products from Sherwin-Williams Co., (SW)

(C1): Match RL Steeple Chase, Color Accents, Satin.

(C2): SW #6328, “Fireweed”, Satin.

(C3): SW #6683, “Bee”, Satin.

(C4): SW #6991, “Black Magic”, Flat.

(C5): SW #6991, “Black Magic”, Satin.

(C6): SW #7006, “Extra White”, Satin.

(C7): SW #6683, “Bee”, Gloss.

(C8): SW #6991, “Black Magic”, Semi-Gloss.

(C9): SW #7055, “Enduring Bronze”, Color to match Face Brick (FBR), Semi-Gloss.

Refer to Section 04810.

(C10): SW #6117, “Smoky Topaz”, Color to match (EIFS1), Semi-Gloss.

Refer to Section 07240.

(C11): SW #7055, “Enduring Bronze”, Semi-Gloss Epoxy.

(C12): SW #7006, “Extra White”, Semi-Gloss Epoxy.

(C13): SW #6898, “Social Butterfly”, Satin, Color match for (EIFS2).

(C14): Clear Finish, Polyurethane Satin, Wood Doors.

Exterior

Concrete

Concrete block

Steel

Galvanized steel

HM Doors and Frames

Fiber Cement Siding and Trim

Gas Piping

Interior

Gypsum board

HM Doors and Frames

Steel overhead structure

Wood, painted

Wood, clear finished

SECTION 09960 – FIELD APPLIED HIGH PERFORMANCE PAINT SYSTEM

This Optional Section is used for specific remodel projects only.

(PS30): PPG Coraflon ADS; Field applied kynar finish for application to existing

storefronts.

(C20): Color: No. ADS9833030, “Anodized Aluminum”.

Material Identification Codes List 04-27-11

00011-11


DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

SECTION 10010 – MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

Indicated on Drawings as:

(Knox Box): Knox Company, 3200 Series, Option for Recessed or Surface Mount. Color:

Dark Bronze.

(Precast Concrete Splash Blocks): Install at downspout locations.

SECTION 10210 - WALL LOUVERS

Indicated on Drawings as:

(LVR1): Intake Louvers with insect screens.

(LVR2): Exhaust Louvers with bird screens.

SECTION 10263 – CORNER GUARDS

Indicated on Drawings as:

(WCG1): 2” x 2” x 48” long, stainless steel wall corner guards.

SECTION 10445 – DOOR AND ROOM SIGNS

Indicated on Drawings as:

(SIGN1): 6” x 9”, Handicap Wall Sign, black sign with engraved white letters and

symbols and Braille coding. Product # SG 2521B, Women.

(SIGN2): 6” x 9”, Handicap Wall Sign, black sign with engraved white letters and

symbols and Braille coding. Product # SG 2511B, Men.

(SIGN3): 4” x 16”, Door sign, black sign with engraved white letters.

Product # SG 2025B, Women.

(SIGN4): 4” x 16”, Door sign, black sign with engraved white letters.

Product # SG 2015B, Men.

SECTION 10500 - LOCKERS

Indicated on Drawings as:

(Lockers): 12” x 12” surface mounted lockers. Configuration: Double tier. 2 units high, 4

units wide, 45” coat rod mounted under lockers. ASI Storage Solutions, Inc.

SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES

Indicated on Drawings as: (FE-#)

(FE1): Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical, bracket mounted.

(FE2): Class K Wet Chemical, bracket mounted.

(FE1 CAB): Cabinet Mounted Portable Fire Extinguishers: Type (FE1) extinguisher.

SECTION 10536 - AWNINGS

Indicated on Drawings as:

(Fabric Awnings): Fabric awning on aluminum frame, furnished as part of signage

package.

SECTION 10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES

Indicated on Drawings as:

The following Toilet Accessories are supplied through Twin City Hardware

Material Identification Codes List 04-27-11

00011-12


Framed Mirrors

(MIR1): Framed mirror, 24” x 36”.

Unframed Mirrors Refer to codes under Section 08800 - Glazing.

Sanitary Napkin Disposal

(SND): Surface mounted, sanitary disposal, 1.5 gal, ASI 0473-A.

Grab Bars (GB) 1-1/2" Grab Bar - Concealed mounting.

(GB1) 18” long.

(GB2) 36” long.

(GB3) 42” long.

Diaper Changing Station

(DCS): Koala, Model KD-200, wall mounted, horizontal.

The following Toilet Accessories are Owner Furnished

Soap Dispensers

(SDISP): Ecolab, Digitizer Handsoap Dispenser.

Paper Towel Dispenser

(PTD):

Toilet Paper Dispenser

1. Tork, Intuition Hand Towel Roll Dispenser.

OR

2. Tork, Elevation H1 Matic Towel Dispenser.

(TPD): Tork, Bath Tissue Jumbo Roll Twin Dispenser.

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

NOT USED

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

SECTION 12493 – WINDOW SHADES

Indicated on Drawings as:

(Window Shades): Owner Furnished, MechoShade 5 manual roller shades.

1. Fabric Color: EuroTwill Shade Cloth; No. 6012, “Charcoal”.

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NOT USED

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS

NOT USED

-End of Materials Identification Codes List-

Material Identification Codes List 04-27-11

00011-13


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 00100 - BID SOLICITATION

1.01 Bid Invitation and Submission for the above referenced project shall be by e-mail and

through the Owner’s FTTP Web Site.

1.02 Bids are to be received no later than 3:00 PM Central Standard Time on the date defined by

the Owner. LATE BIDS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED FOR CONSIDERATION.

1.03 Bidders agree in submitting a proposal that the bid will remain firm for a period not less than

ninety (90) days from the bid due date stipulated above. Bids to receive consideration must

be complete and cover the full scope of work described in the bid documents and must

include unit pricing (see attached). Substitutions for material and equipment listed in the bid

documents is not permitted. Clarifications and acknowledgement of Addenda shall be noted

in the bid proposal.

1.04 By submitting a bid each bidder represents and acknowledges the following:

A. They have read and understand the bid documents and their bid is made in accordance

therewith. Bid shall acknowledge and record the bid documents issuance dated and index of

drawings;

B. Basis of payment is a LUMP SUM;

C. Has visited the site (General Contractor and/or Subcontractor) and has familiarized themselves

with local conditions under which the work is to be performed. Discrepancies between existing

conditions and bid documents shall be identified, written, and submitted to Owner for

clarification prior to bid submission. Compensation for unidentified discrepancies shall be at the

Owner's discretion for payment.

D. Their bid is based upon the materials, systems and equipment described in the bid documents

without exceptions (No substitutions will be accepted on material and equipment as listed in the

bid documents).

E. Their bid is based on a site specific schedule, from permit to Certificate of Occupancy, as stated

in the Instructions to Bidders Document. No extension of the project's schedule is anticipated

and no extension of the contract is allowed without the specific written instructions of the Owner.

The proposed construction time is firm and critical.

F. Within seven (7) days after award of the contract, the successful bidder will submit a

construction schedule and subcontractor list to the Owner. Owner retains the right to reject any

subcontractor bids as deemed necessary.

G. Upon the start of construction, Contractor shall submit daily progress reports, and weekly

progress photos (hard or digital photos), due on Thursday evenings.

H. The Bid will identify the Project Manager and Superintendent for the job.

1.05 Refer to Drawing Sheet G001 for Project Responsibility Matrix.

1.06 All questions must be received in writing no less than seven days before bids are due.

A. Bid proposals must be in accordance with the Owner provided Bid Template. See Budget Bid

Template issued for site specific bids.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 BID SOLICITATION

00100 -1


SECTION 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS –

Metrocenter / Phoenix, AZ

PART 1 - PRE-BID REQUIREMENTS

1.01

INTENT

A. The Owner/Architect has made every effort to set forth in the Bid Documents the complete

scope of the Work. Nevertheless, minor omissions and discrepancies shall not excuse the

Bidder from providing a price to totally complete the project in accordance with the intent of

these documents.

1. Bring any conflicts, omissions, or discrepancies to the attention of the Owner prior to

submission of an executed bid form. These issues shall be communicated via fax or

email only. No verbal direction is allowed.

2. After execution of the Contract, no extra charges will be allowed for items of work where

such are concluded to conform to normal construction practices and methods.

3. The Contractor and subcontractors have read and understand the Bidding Documents and

shall base their bids in accordance with these documents. If conflicts occur within these

documents, and without prior clarification, the bidders shall base his bid on the most

stringent case of each conflict.

1.02

CONFIRMATION

A. Inquiries: Notify the Owner if the meaning of the documents is in doubt, or if discrepancies

or omissions are noted. This notification shall be by written correspondence only. An

Addendum clarifying the issue in question will be sent to all Bidders.

B. Site Inspection: Visit the location where the Work is to be performed, become thoroughly

familiar with all conditions affecting the work, and compare conditions with the Bid

Documents. No consideration will be granted for any misunderstanding of existing

conditions resulting from failure to visit the site.

04-27-11 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00200 -1


CONTRACT FORMS

C. Read carefully and become familiar with the forms identified in the List of Contract Forms.

1. Should the Owner elect to enter into an agreement to execute the Work, the listed forms

prepared by Buffalo Wild Wings, Inc. shall be used. A copy of the Contract accompanies

these Instructions to Bidders for review.

1.03

LAWS AND REGULATIONS

A. All applicable federal, state, and local laws and ordinances, as well as the rules and

regulations of the jurisdiction where the work is to be executed, shall apply to the Contract

throughout. These will be deemed to be included in the Contract to the same extent as

though herein written, including, but not limited to the following:

1. Rules and regulations issued by the City of Phoenix, AZ.

2. Rules and regulations issued by the State of Arizona.

3. Rules and regulations issued by Maricopa County Environmental Health.

4. Rules and regulations issued as part of a developer’s agreement.

1.04

COMPLETION TIME

A. Evaluation of each Bid will include serious consideration of the time of completion. The

Bidder shall be prepared to execute the Contract to accommodate the Owner's commitments

and shall govern himself accordingly in completing the Bid Form.

B. The Bidder is hereby advised that the Owner has made commitments to Metrocenter based

upon the following construction schedule:

1. Start Construction -- date T.B.D.

2. Complete Construction -- date T.B.D.

PART 2 - BID PROCEDURES

2.01

BID DOCUMENTS

A. You may view and order bid documents by going to the Buffalo Wild Wings Online Plan

Room at: www.DesignBidBuild.net/franz?BuffaloWildWings

B. If it is your first time, please register and retain your login information for future access to the

Buffalo Wild Wings Online Plan Room.

C. After you have registered. Please use your email address and the password you created to

log into the Plan Room. Please enter the project password (This is case

sensitive) Once you have selected the project, review the Bid Details for information on

ordering documents.

04-27-11 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00200 -2


D. To receive Bid Notices, Bid Addendums, Construction Bulletins, Shipped Order

Confirmations, and Electronic Downloads for this project from Buffalo Wild Wings, you must

place the following email address in your list of Outlook Contacts: notice@designbidbuild.net

Notifications are sent from this email address and not from Buffalo Wild Wings. If you do not

do this, your email server may block the receipt of these notifications. There is a ?Help

button that you can select for assistance using the Online Plan Room.

E. If you still have problems, please contact Franz Reprographics by phone @ 763-503-3401.

F. Trusted Site Settings: www.designbidbuild.net will need to be set as a trusted site. Go to

‘Internet Options’, under ‘Tools’ and click on the ‘Security Tab’. Then go to the ‘Trusted

Sites’ option and click on ‘Sites’. Type: https://www.designbidbuild.net into the text field and

click ‘Add’. The name will then drop into the menu below. Repeat this for:

http://designbidbuild.net when entering this address, uncheck “require server

verification(https:) for all sites in this zone. Click ‘OK’ to leave

2.02

PREPARATION OF BIDS

A. The Bid shall be prepared using the Bid Form template forwarded electronically by Buffalo

Wild Wings, Inc.; no other forms will be considered.

1. Bids shall be submitted electronically, with hard copy to follow within 48 hrs. Email Bids to

Carmen Conley - (bids@buffalowildwings.com)

2. Bids shall include the Bidder's legal name, fully written.

3. Oral, telegraphic, or other modifications will not be considered.

4. Bids shall include a preliminary construction schedule.

5. Bids shall include a list of qualifications and or exclusions.

6. Bid period is approximately three (3) weeks.

B. Bid Forms shall be sent for delivery prior to the date and time indicated in the Invitation to

Bid Letter.

2.03

OWNER’S RESPONSE TO BIDS

A. Submitted Bid Forms will be opened and read privately on the date indicated in the Invitation

to Bid Letter. Notice of award will be made by the Owner after consideration of Bids

received.

B. The Owner reserves the right to respond to the Bids as follows:

1. Reject any or all Bids without explanation.

2. Waive technicalities.

3. Advertise for new bids.

4. Proceed to do the work otherwise.

C. The following Bids may be rejected as being informal:

1. Bids that fail to meet the requirements of these instructions.

2. Bids that are incomplete, conditional, or obscure.

3. Bids that contain additions not called for, erasures, alterations, or other irregularities.

4. Bids that contain abnormally high or abnormally low prices for any class or item of work.

04-27-11 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00200 -3


PART 3 - CONTRACT EXECUTION

3.01

POST-BID SUBMITTALS

A. After notification of selection for the award of a Contract, but prior to issuance of a

Construction Agreement, the Bidder shall submit the following to the Owner in writing.

1. A designation of the work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces.

2. Names of the manufacturers, products and the suppliers of principal items or systems of

materials and equipment proposed for the Work.

3. Names of persons or entities proposed for the execution of principal portions of the

Work.

B. The Owner will notify the Bidder in writing if the Owner has reasonable objection to a

Subcontractor proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner has reasonable objection to a proposed

Subcontractor, the Bidder may, at the Bidder's option:

1. Withdraw the bid.

2. Submit an acceptable substitute subcontractor with an adjustment in the Bid to cover the

difference in cost.

C. The Owner may accept the adjusted Bid Price or disqualify the Bidder. Persons and entities

accepted by the Owner must be used on the work for which they were proposed and shall not

be changed except with the written consent of the Owner.

3.02

INSURANCE AND BONDS

A. Insurance: Upon receipt of a written “Notice to Proceed”, the Bidder shall furnish to the

Owner a certificate of insurance in compliance with the requirements of the following:

1. General Conditions of the Contract.

2. Special Conditions of the Contract.

B. Performance and Payment Bonds (if required by Owner): Upon receipt of a Construction

Contract, the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner a Performance Bond and Labor & Materials

Payment Bond, both for the full amount of the Contract.

1. The bonds shall be provided by a properly qualified surety company.

2. The cost of the Performance and Payment Bonds shall be indicated on the Bid Form and

shall be included in the total proposed Contract Amount.

3.03

LABOR FORCE

A. Cooperation: The Bidder is advised that the Work may be performed within a building

currently occupied by the public. The Bidder shall assure the Owner that he will provide

labor that can work without unduly disturbing the public and ongoing operations within the

building.

04-27-11 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00200 -4


B. Non-Discrimination: The Bidder is advised that the Owner will not tolerate any

discrimination on the basis of age, gender, race, national origin, or sexual orientation by the

Bidder or Subcontractors.

END OF BID INSTRUCTIONS

04-27-11 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00200 -5


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 00220 - SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

A. Geotechnical Investigation (Subsurface Soils Tests) for the project site has been performed and a

report of that investigation has been completed. A copy of the investigation report is contained

within Section 00221.

1.02 SUBSURFACE INFORMATION

A. Log of borings indicates materials penetrated at specific locations. Owner and/or Architect

assume no responsibility for any conclusions or interpretations made by Contractor related to

information included in the Report. Should Contractor require additional information concerning

sub-surface conditions, he may without cost to Owner, make additional investigations. Should

additional investigations produce information different from that in Soil Report, notify Owner in

writing.

1.03 REQUIREMENT

A. Contractor read and otherwise become completely familiar with contents of Soil Report, including

but not limited to its recommendations for preparation of subsoil, bases, sub-bases and fill and

construction of building foundations, parking and paving. Provide building foundations in

compliance with recommendations in Report. Should discrepancy be found between the

requirements of Soil Report and the drawings and/or specifications, notify Owner in writing prior

to beginning Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION

00220 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 01100 – SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1—GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Project Identification:

1. Project: Buffalo Wild Wings Grill & Bar at Metrocenter, 10402 N. Black Canyon Highway,

Phoenix AZ 85051-1506.

B. Contract Documents, prepared by the Architect, GHA Architecture / Development

C. The Work consists of a total square footage as described in the Contract Documents.

D. All Work shall be constructed in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations. Work

shall be installed in accordance with generally accepted standards of construction and in strict

accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and specifications whether specifically

detailed in the Contract Documents or not.

E. Contractor shall maintain Owner and Landlord required insurance and Workers’ Compensation

at all times and furnish proof of same to Owner prior to start of construction.

F. Work Not Included: The following will be provided by others:

1. See the Comprehensive Equipment Schedule and Project Responsibility Matrix on

Drawing G001, which designates responsibility for furnishing and installing the various

items included in the Project, as well as final connections.

1.02 WORK / SITE RESTRICTIONS

A. Contractor shall comply with all building Owner’s standards.

B. Contractor’s Use of Premises: During construction, Contractor shall have full use of the site.

Contractor’s use of premises is limited only by Owner’s right to perform work or employ other

contractors on portions of Project and as follows:

1. On-Site No Smoking Policy: As designated below, the Contractor will be responsible to

maintain a No Smoking Policy on site. This policy will include the Contractor’s personnel,

subcontractors, material delivery personnel and all other field people on site. There will be

no smoking permitted on site after the following time periods. This No Smoking Policy will

be strictly enforced.

a. There will be no smoking on the roof area after the roofing materials are installed.

b. There will be no smoking inside the building area after the building has been

enclosed. This will commence when the exterior openings have been enclosed and

the insulation and drywall installation begins.

PART 2—PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3—EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 SUMMARY OF WORK

01100 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 01200 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1—GENERAL

1.01 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

A. Upon Owner’s approval of a Proposal Request Form from the Contractor, the Owner will initiate

and issue a Change Order, for all changes to Contract Sum or Contract Time. Contractor shall

not proceed with the additional Work without duly executed Change Order.

1.02 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. Submit a Schedule of Values with the first Application for Payment. In Schedule of Values,

break down Contract Sum into at least one line item for each Specification Section. Correlate

the Schedule of Values with Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

B. Submit one (1) copy of each application for payment to Owner according to the schedule

established in Owner/Contractor Agreement.

1. Submit final Application for Payment after completion of Project closeout procedures with

final release of liens and supporting documentation. Include consent of surety to final

payment and insurance certificates.

PART 2—PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3—EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01200 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 01300 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1—GENERAL

1.01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

A. Verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to property survey and existing

benchmarks, before laying out the Work.

B. Coordinate construction to ensure efficient and orderly execution of each part of the Work

C. Three (3) Meetings will be held at Project site with the Owner or Architect. The first Meeting will

be held at commencement of Construction; the second Meeting will be roughly halfway through

Construction; the third Meeting will be at the time of generation of the Punch List. Notify Owner

and Architect of Meeting dates. Each subcontractor or other entity concerned with current

progress or involved with planning or coordination of future activities, shall attend.

1. RFI will be generated by General Contractor for issues that will need clarification.

1.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Prepare a horizontal bar-chart Construction schedule, based on a Construction schedule which

will be provided by the Owner. Provide a separate time bar for each activity and a vertical line

to identify the first workday of each week. Use same breakdown of Work indicated in the

Schedule of Values. As Work progresses, mark each bar to indicate actual completion.

1. Submit within 10 days after date established for Commencement of the Work.

2. Coordinate each element with other activities. Show each activity in proper sequence.

Indicate sequences necessary for completion of related Work.

3. Indicate Substantial Completion and allow time for Owner’s procedures necessary for

certifying Substantial Completion.

4. Schedule Distribution: Distribute copies to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, and parties

required to comply with dates.

5. Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been

made. Distribute revised copies to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, and parties required

to comply with dates.

1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordinate submittal preparation with construction schedule, fabrication lead-times, other

submittals, and activities that require sequential operations.

1. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized due to failure to transmit submittals in

time to permit processing sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the

Work.

2. Structural Engineer/Architect will not accept submittals from sources other than the

Contractor.

B. Prepare submittals by placing a permanent label on each for identification. Provide a space on

the label or beside title block to record review and approval markings and action taken. Include

the following information on the label:

1. Project name.

2. Date.

3. Name and address of Contractor.

4. Name and address of subcontractor or supplier.

5. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

6. Contractor’s certification that materials comply with specified requirements.

C. Coordinate each submittal with other submittals and with Work that does not require submittals.

04-27-11 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01300 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

D. Product Data: Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Include the following:

1. Data indicating compliance with specified standards and requirements.

2. Notation of coordination requirements.

3. For equipment data, include rated capacities, dimensions, weights, required clearances,

and furnished specialties and accessories.

E. Shop Drawings: Submit newly prepared information drawn to scale. Do not reproduce Contract

Documents or copy standard information. Submit four (4) blue or black line prints. Structural

Engineer/Architect will return two (2) copies. Include the following:

1. Dimensions, profiles, methods of attachment, coordination with adjoining work, large scale

details, and other information, as appropriate for the Work.

2. Identification of products and materials.

3. Notation of coordination requirements.

4. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

5. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.

F. Samples: Submit Samples finished as specified and identical with the material proposed.

Include product name or name of manufacturer.

G. Structural Engineer/Architect will review each submittal, mark as appropriate to indicate action

taken, and return copies less those retained. Compliance with specified requirements remains

Contractor’s responsibility.

1. Structural Engineer to review all structural related submittals for all projects.

2. Architect to review substitution requests for alternate products as applicable per project.

H. Shop Drawings, sample and/or Product Data Submittals are required for the specification

sections identified on the schedules following this section.

PART 2—PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3—EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01300 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Quality control services include inspections, tests, and related actions including reports. Quality

control services are further specified in other Sections of these Specifications and shall be

performed by independent testing agencies provided by Contractor or Owner, as specified.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, quality-control services required by authorities having

jurisdiction will be provided by Owner.

B. Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections and tests.

C. Retesting: Contractor shall pay for retesting where results of inspections and tests prove

unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with requirements.

D. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with agencies performing inspections and tests. Provide auxiliary

services as requested. Notify agency in advance of operations requiring tests or inspections, to

permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services include the following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities to assist inspections and tests.

3. Adequate quantities of materials that require testing, and assisting in taking samples.

4. Facilities for storage and curing of test samples.

5. Security and protection of samples and test equipment.

E. Duties of Testing Agency: Testing agency shall cooperate with Architect and Contractor in

performing its duties. Agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform inspections and tests.

1. Agency shall promptly notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies

observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Agency shall not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents

or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

3. Agency shall not perform duties of Contractor.

F. Submittals: Testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection and test to

the following:

1. Owner.

2. Architect.

3. Contractor.

4. Authorities having jurisdiction, when authorities so direct.

G. Report Data: Reports of each inspection, test, or similar service shall include at least the

following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.

2. Project title and testing agency's project number.

3. Designation (number) and date of report.

4. Dates and locations where samples were taken or inspections and field tests made.

5. Names of individuals taking the sample or making the inspection or test.

6. Designation of the product and test method.

7. Complete inspection or test data including an interpretation of test results.

8. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.

9. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with

requirements.

10. Recommendations on retesting or re-inspection.

11. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

04-27-11 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01400 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

H. Testing Agency Qualifications: Engage inspection and testing agencies that are prequalified as

complying with the American Council of Independent Laboratories' "Quality Assurance Manual"

and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed.

1. Each testing agency shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the

State where Project is located.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 – EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01400 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1—GENERAL

1.01 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

A. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241, "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and

Demolition Operations"; ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction

and Demolition"; and NECA Electrical Design Library's "Temporary Electrical Facilities."

1. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for

temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. At the earliest possible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary

utility services to use of permanent utilities.

C. Remove temporary facilities and controls before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining

after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions

acceptable to Owner.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Provide temporary utility services, including electric power & lighting, water, power, fire

protection, gas & telephone to Project site for use during construction. Arrange for and

coordinate utility services with local utility companies.

1. Contractor shall pay use charges for temporary utilities.

B. Provide temporary heat for curing or drying of work, and for protection of new construction from

adverse effects of low temperatures. Use of gasoline-burning heaters and open-flame heaters is

not permitted.

1. Maintain a minimum 50 degree F. temperature within the construction area until such time

as the permanent heating plant is installed, inspected and functional.

3.02 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

A. Provide field offices, storage trailers, and other support facilities as necessary for efficient

prosecution of the Work.

1. Temporary facilities located within the construction area or within 30 feet of building lines

shall be of noncombustible construction.

B. Contractor shall confirm with the Owner’s representative an acceptable location outside the

building to securely store materials and stage construction operations. Thence, the Contractor

shall confine operations strictly within this area. Contractor shall keep storage and staging area

clean and neat at all times and shall not allow the accumulation of debris or trash.

C. Provide temporary sanitary facilities for all construction personnel. Comply with regulations and

health codes for type, number, location, and maintenance of facilities.

D. Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction and workers from exposure and

inclement weather and for containment of heat.

E. Install project identification and other signs in locations approved by Owner to inform the public

and persons seeking entrance to Project.

04-27-11 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01500 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

F. Collect waste daily and, when containers are full, legally dispose of waste off-site.

1. Contractor is responsible for maintaining a dumpster for waste generated by all

subcontractors (owner’s & contractor’s) & trades until the restaurant opens for business.

Waste removal shall be scheduled on a regular basis.

2. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials in separate closed waste

containers. Dispose of material according to applicable laws and regulations.

G. Open flames are expressly prohibited without the knowledge of and prior consent of the owner’s

representative.

3.03 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

A. Provide temporary fire protection per OSHA until permanent systems supply fire-protection

needs.

1. Provide adequate numbers and types of fire extinguishers.

2. Store combustible materials in fire-safe containers in fire-safe locations.

3. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas.

4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition.

B. Provide temporary barricades, warning signs, and lights to protect the public and construction

personnel from construction hazards per OSHA.

1. Enclose construction areas with fences with lockable entrance gates, to prevent

unauthorized access per OSHA.

C. Provide temporary environmental controls as required by authorities having jurisdiction

including, but not limited to, dust control, noise control, and pollution control.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01500 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1—GENERAL

1.01 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products of same kind from a single source. The term "product" includes the terms

"material”, "equipment”, "system”, and similar terms.

B. Deliver, store, and handle products according to manufacturer's written instructions, using

means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage and to prevent overcrowding Construction

spaces.

2. Deliver in manufacturer's original sealed packaging with labels and written instructions for

handling, storing, protecting, and installing.

3. Inspect products at time of delivery for compliance with the Contract Documents and to

ensure items are undamaged and properly protected.

4. Store heavy items in a manner that will not endanger supporting construction.

5. Store products subject to damage on platforms or pallets, under cover in a weather tight

enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and

humidity within range required.

C. Product Substitutions: Reasonable and timely requests for substitutions will be considered.

Substitutions include products and methods of Construction differing from that required by the

Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor after award of Contract.

1. Submit four (4) copies of each request for product substitution. Identify product to be

replaced and provide complete documentation showing compliance of proposed

substitution with applicable requirements. Include a full comparison with the specified

product, a list of changes to other Work required to accommodate the substitution, and any

proposed changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time should the substitution be accepted.

2. Submit requests for product substitution in time to permit processing of request for

subsequent Submittals, if any, sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the

Work. Do not submit unapproved substitutions on Shop Drawings or other submittals.

3. Architect & Owner will review the proposed substitution and notify Contractor of its

acceptance or rejection. Acceptance of substitution does not relieve the Contractor of

coordinating all other items. The substitution affects at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2—PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and are new at the

time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, and other devices and

components needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.

B. Do not attach manufacturer's labels or trademarks, except for required nameplates, on surfaces

exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. Do not remove labels from equipment

required to have labels attached.

C. Select products as follows:

1. Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the item indicated. No

substitutions will be permitted.

2. Where two or more product or manufacturers are named, provide one of the items

indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.

3. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or

equal," provide the named item or comply with provisions concerning "product

substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product or manufacturer.

4. Where a product is described with required characteristics, with or without naming a brand

04-27-11 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

01600 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

or trademark, provide a product that complies with those characteristics and other Contract

requirements.

5. Where compliance with performance requirements is specified, provide products that

comply and are recommended in writing by the manufacturer for the Application.

6. Where compliance with codes, regulations, or standards is specified, select a product that

complies with the codes, regulations, or standards referenced.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, architect will select color, pattern, and texture of each product from

manufacturer's full range of standard options.

2.02 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. The following products will be furnished by Owner and shall be installed by Contractor as part of

the Work:

1. See the Comprehensive Equipment Schedule and Project Responsibility Matrix on the

Architectural Drawing G100.

B. Contractor shall coordinate all delivery dates and installation requirements & verify quantities of

Owner-furnished items with the Owner prior to the start of Construction.

PART 3—EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

01600 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 01620 - REFERENCES

PART 1—GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Definitions of terms.

2. Provisions of reference standards.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. By Owner: Items that will be ordered, paid for and shipped to Project by Owner. Contractor to

receive, unload, unpack or uncrate, protect, move into place, install and connect these items as

specified or indicated in the Contract Documents.

B. Provide: Furnish and install, including without limitation, labor, materials, equipment,

transportation, services, and other items required to complete referenced tasks.

C. Furnish: Pay for, deliver (or receive), unload, inspect, and store as specified or directed while

retaining care, custody and control until received for installation by others.

D. Install: Receive, set or place in position, make required connections, adjust and test for

satisfactory performance and operation.

E. Product: Materials, systems, and equipment incorporated in or to be incorporated in the Project.

F. Herein: As used in the Contract Documents refers to the contents of a particular Section, of the

contents within parts of the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - General Requirements.

G. Not In Contract (N.I.C.): Products not in the Contract, but which may require provisions in the

construction for future installation by Others.

H. Work: Construction and services required by Contract Documents, whether completed of

partially completed, and includes labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be

provided by Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole

or a part of the Project.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Reference Standards: For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, Federal

Standards, or other reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except

when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by governing regulations.

B. Standard Dates: Where no specific date of standard is specified, use the most current issued

standard that is in effect as of the Project Bid date.

C. When required by individual Specification Sections or otherwise needed for proper performance

of Work, obtain a copy of the standard. Maintain a copy of standard at Site during submittals,

planning, and progress of the affected work, until Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 REFERENCES

01620 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Maintain a set of Contract Drawings as Record Drawings. Mark to show

installation that varies from the Work originally shown.

B. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of the Project Manual, including addenda, as Record

Specifications. Mark to show variations in Work performed in comparison with the text of the

Specifications and modifications.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Organize data into three-ring binders, with pocket folders for

folded sheet information. Mark identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the

following:

1. Emergency instructions.

2. Spare parts list.

3. Copies of warranties.

4. Wiring diagrams.

5. Shop Drawings and Product Data.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with manufacturer's written requirements

including, but not limited to, surfaces that are sound, level, and plumb; substrates within

installation tolerances; surfaces that are smooth, clean, and free of deleterious substances; and

application conditions within environmental limits. Proceed with installation only after

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Prepare substrates and adjoining surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions,

including, but not limited to, filler and primer application.

C. Where Drawings indicate dimensions of existing construction verify by field measurement.

Where fabricated products are to be fitted to other construction verify dimensions by field

measurement before fabricating and, when possible, allow for fitting and trimming during

installation.

3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Do not cut structural members without prior written approval of Architect.

B. For patching, provide materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of

existing materials. For exposed surfaces, provide or finish materials to visually match existing

adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Anchor each product securely in

place, accurately located and aligned. Clean exposed surfaces and protect from damage. If

applicable, prepare surfaces for field finishing.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 for installation of electrically operated equipment and electrical

components and materials.

04-27-11 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

01700 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.04 FINAL CLEANING

A. Clean each surface or item as follows before requesting inspection for certification of

Substantial Completion:

1. Remove labels that are not permanent.

2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors. Remove excess glazing compounds.

Replace chipped or broken glass.

3. Clean exposed finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and foreign

substances. Leave concrete floors broom clean.

4. Vacuum carpeted surfaces and clean quarry tile flooring & base.

5. Clean according to tile & grout manufacturers’ specific recommendations.

6. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication. Clean

plumbing fixtures. Clean light fixtures and lamps. Clean walk-in refrigeration units.

7. Remove all construction debris, unused materials, etc. when project is turned over to

Owner. Maintain the site in a clean condition during the course of construction. Sweep

paved areas; remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits. Rake grounds to a smooth, eventextured

surface.

3.05 PUNCH LIST

A. At time of third Meeting (refer to Specification Section 01300) A copy of the Punch List will be

provided to the Contractor.

3.06 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Request Substantial Completion inspection once the following are complete:

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

2. Submit Record Drawings and Specifications, maintenance manuals, warranties, and

similar record information.

3. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of operation to Owner’s personnel.

4. Remove temporary facilities and controls.

5. Complete final cleanup.

6. Complete Punch List Repairs.

7. Obtain final inspections from authorities having jurisdiction.

8. Obtain Certificate of Occupancy.

9. Obtain Certificate of Capacity.

10. Submit Consent of Surety to final payment.

B. Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires operation and maintenance to provide

instruction to Owner's personnel. Include a detailed review of the following:

1. Startup and shutdown.

2. Emergency operations and safety procedures.

3. Noise and vibration adjustments.

4. Maintenance manuals.

5. Spare parts, tools, and materials.

6. Lubricants and fuels.

7. Identification systems.

8. Control sequences.

9. Hazards.

10. Warranties and bonds.

C. Request inspection for certification of final acceptance, once the following are complete:

1. Submit a copy of the Substantial Completion inspection list stating that each item has been

completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

04-27-11 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

01700 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

D. Owner will re-inspect the Work on receipt of notice that the Work has been completed.

1. If the Work has been satisfactorily completed, Owner will sign and date the punchlist cover

sheet. GC will fax/email a copy of this signed and dated cover sheet to the Construction

Manager prior to Opening. GC Superintendent is to remain at the job site through Store

Opening to provide Supervision of all Punchlist item completions, Vendor Installation and

all adjustments as required by Store Personnel. Contractor shall guarantee all materials

and workmanship for one year beginning at date of Opening.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

01700 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 02223 - MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

A. Removal of designated construction.

B. Disposal of materials.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01100 – Summary of Work: Work sequence and continued occupancy of the building.

B. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary enclosures.

C. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute:

1. ANSI A10.6: “Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition”.

B. National Fire Protection Association:

1. NFPA 241: “Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations”.

1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical

disconnection and re-connection.

B. Obtain required permits from authorities.

C. Do not close or obstruct egress from any building exit or site exit without specific approval from

the Owner and municipal authority.

D. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 days' prior written notice to

Owner and without specific approval from the municipal authority.

E. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when hazardous or contaminated materials are

discovered.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the

necessary trades and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods

needed for proper performance of the work of this section.

B. Comply with ANSI 10.6 and NFPA 241.

1.05 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule work under the provisions of Section 01300.

B. Schedule work to coincide with new construction and phasing.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas.

1. Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum

interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, parking lots, and other adjacent

occupied and used facilities.

B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect. Do not

resume operations until directed.

04-27-11 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

02223 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Correct

conditions detrimental to timely and proper execution of the Work. Do not proceed until

unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. In company with the Owner, Architect and appropriate engineering disciplines, visit the site and

verify the extent of selective demolition required.

1. Carefully identify limits of selective demolition.

2. Mark interface surfaces as required to enable workers to identify items to be removed and

items to be left intact.

C. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers at locations indicated and as otherwise

determined to be necessary.

D. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.

E. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit

continued building occupancy.

F. Protect existing materials that are not to be demolished.

G. Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring.

H. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements.

I. Mark location and termination of utilities.

J. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress.

3.02 DEMOLITION

A. Disconnect, remove, and identify designated utilities within demolition areas.

B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members.

C. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn

or bury materials on site.

D. Remove materials as demolition progresses. Upon completion of demolition, leave areas in

clean condition.

E. Remove temporary facilities.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

02223 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Soil treatment for termite control.

SECTION 02360 - SOIL TREATMENT

B. Application below grade and at interior and exterior foundation perimeter.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

1. EPA - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Procedures

1. Product Data: Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule,

and intended application rate.

2. Assurance/Control Submittals:

a. Certificates:

1) Manufacturer's certificate that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

2) Certification that Products comply with EPA regulations for termiticides.

3) Certification that Products conform to requirements of local authority having

jurisdiction.

b. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating

compliance with specified qualification requirements.

B. Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals.

1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record moisture content of soil before treatment,

date and rate of application, areas of application, diary of meter readings and

corresponding soil coverage.

2. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty with forms complete.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with

minimum 5 years documented experience and licensed in accordance with regulations of

authorities having jurisdiction for application of chemical toxicant.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for application requirements, application

licensing, authority to use toxicant chemicals, and in accordance with EPA regulations.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original unopened containers with labels intact, identifying

Product and manufacturer, application instructions, and EPA federal registration number.

B. Do not store Products on site. Deliver Products to site at time of application.

1.06 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Take necessary precautions to prevent leaching, spillage, and wind drift or spray or dust of

material. Do not drain or flush storage containers and application equipment outside treated

area or into sewers or water courses.

B. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply soil treatment to frozen or wet soils or during rain or

snow.

04-27-11 SOIL TREATMENT

02360 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty:

1. Submit written warranty signed by soil treatment applicator and Contractor certifying that

applied chemical toxicant treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites.

a. State that application was made at concentration, rates, and methods as specified.

b. State that if subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period,

Contractor will retreat soil and repair damage caused by termite infestation at no

additional cost to the Owner.

2. Cover against invasion or propagation of subterranean termites, damage to building or

building contents caused by termites; repairs to building or building contents so caused.

3. Provide for inspection of Work annually; report in writing to designated Owner’s

representative.

4. Warranty Period: 5 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. EPA and local authority having jurisdiction approved chemical toxicant; water based emulsion,

uniform composition, with synthetic dye to permit visual identification of treated soil, bearing

Federal registration number of the EPA.

B. Do not use fuel oil as diluent.

C. Specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites.

D. Solution containing one of the following chemical elements and concentrations:

1. Permathrin: 0.5 percent in water emulsion.

a. Dragnet FT, by FMC Corporation.

b. Torpedo, by ICI Americas Corporation.

2.02 MIX DILUTION

A. Dilute and mix toxicant chemical to manufacturer's published instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions

are as required, and ready to receive Work.

1. Verify the soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, ready to receive

treatment.

2. Verify final grading is complete.

B. Report in writing to Owner prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution

of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting

unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove foreign matter, loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted

areas under slabs and foundations.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Apply toxicant within 12 hours before installation of vapor retardant under slab-on-grade.

04-27-11 SOIL TREATMENT

02360 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

B. Apply toxicant to soil at the following rates, using metered applicator:

1. Under Floor Slabs-On-Grade:

a. Soil or Unwashed Gravel: 1 gallon per 10 square feet.

b. Washed Gravel or Other Course Absorbent Material: 1-1/2 gallons per 10 square

feet.

2. Both Sides of Foundation Wall:

a. Concrete: 4 gallons per 10 lineal feet, to depth of 12 inches.

b. Masonry: 4 gallons per 10 lineal feet for each foot of foundation depth.

c. Foundation Penetrations: 2 gallons per lineal foot.

C. Exterior Foundation: 4 gallons per 10 lineal feet of trench along outside edge of building.

1. Dig trench 6 inches to 8 inches wide along outside of foundation to minimum depth of 12

inches and apply toxicant.

2. Mix toxicant with soil as it is being backfilled.

D. Apply toxicant as a coarse spray; provide uniform distribution.

E. Reapply toxicant to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading, or other

construction activities occurring after initial toxicant application.

3.04 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interface with Other Work:

1. Coordinate application of toxicant at foundation perimeter with finish grading and

landscaping work; avoid disturbance of treated soil.

B. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that toxicant has been applied to soil.

Remove signs after areas are covered by other construction.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect and test soil areas where toxicant was applied to determine the presence of any

remaining termites before covering with subsequent construction.

B. Reapply toxicant to areas where inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites. Use

same toxicant as for original treatment.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Remove storage containers and application equipment from site immediately after application.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 SOIL TREATMENT

02360 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 03300 - CAST- IN - PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Concrete formwork.

B. Floors and slabs on grade.

C. Concrete reinforcement.

D. Joint devices associated with concrete work.

E. Concrete curing.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements.

B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements.

C. Section 03351 - Concrete Integral Hardener and Sealer.

D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute, (ACI):

1. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and

Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International.

2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute

International.

3. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute

International.

4. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American

Concrete Institute International.

5. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International.

6. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International..

7. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International.

8. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary;

American Concrete Institute International.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain,

for Concrete.

2. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement.

3. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

4. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens.

5. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

6. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.

7. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

8. ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.

9. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by

the Volumetric Method.

10. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

11. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for

Curing Concrete.

12. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

04-27-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03300 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

13. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural

Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.

14. ASTM C 685/C 685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching

and Continuous Mixing.

15. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Nonshrink).

16. ASTM D 994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete

(Bituminous Type).

17. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete

Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

18. ASTM E 1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact

with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Mix Designs: Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to Construction Manager

for review prior to commencement of concrete operations.

C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and

components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from

the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures

through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.

D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FORMWORK

A. Form Materials: Provide standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic

head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances.

1. Form Coating: Release agent that will not bond with, stain or adversely affect concrete or

interfere with application of coatings.

2.02 REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with requirements as indicated on Structural Drawings.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel

wire into flat sheets.

D. Reinforcement Accessories:

1. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and

fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar

supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of

Standard Practice".

04-27-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03300 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal and Type IA - Air-Entraining Portland type.

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33.

C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.

D. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C 618, Class N.

E. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.

2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES

A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight

of cement.

B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. Provide Daravair manufactured by W. R. Grace.

C. Chemical Admixtures:

1. Water Reducing: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.

3. Accelerating: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.

4. Water Reducing and Retarding: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

5. Water Reducing and Accelerating: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.

6. Water Reducing, High Range: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

7. Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's

recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block VB10.

b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type- 65.

c. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 10 mils.

B. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,

cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7000 psi.

a. Conspec: “Enduro 50 Grout”.

b. Euclid: "Euco N-S Grout".

c. L & M: "Duragrout".

d. Sonneborn: "Sonogrout 10k".

e. Five Star Products, Inc.: "Five Star Grout".

f. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.: Certi-Vex Grout #1000.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171; regular curing paper, white curing paper, clear

polyethylene, white polyethylene, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent.

1. Provide curing compound that is compatible with floor finish adhesives.

2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS

A. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM

D 1751, thickness as indicated on drawings and full depth of slab less 1/2 inch.

B. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07900.

04-27-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03300 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture

designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

2. Take care in developing mix designs to minimize curling and effects of casting directly on

vapor retarder.

3. Develop concrete mix designs for slabs on grade to minimize curling and other effects

resulting from casting directly on vapor retarder sheet.

B. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.

C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates

recommended by manufacturer.

D. Concrete Mix Properties:

1. Structural Concrete:

a. 28 day compressive strength: 3000 psi.

b. Maximum aggregate size: 3/4 inch.

c. Maximum slump: 3-5 inches.

d. Maximum water/cement ratio: 0.5.

2. Interior slab on grade:

a. 28 day compressive strength: 4000 psi.

b. Maximum aggregate size: 3/4 inch.

c. Maximum slump: 3-5 inches.

d. Maximum water/cement ratio: 0.5.

3. Exterior concrete exposed to freeze-thaw cycles:

a. 28 day compressive strength: 4000 psi.

b. Maximum aggregate size: 3/4 inch.

c. Maximum slump: 3-5 inches.

d. Maximum water/cement ratio: 0.55.

e. Entrained Air Content: 6±1%.

4. Masonry Grout:

a. 28 day compressive strength: 3000 psi.

b. Maximum aggregate size: 3/8 inch.

c. Maximum slump: 8-10 inches.

2.08 MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

B. Project Site Mixing: Measure, batch and mix in drum type batch mixer, according to ASTM C

685. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all

applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.

B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.

C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of

form accessories.

04-27-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03300 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

D. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by

cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

E. Install No. 5 rebar dowels 24 inches on center where new concrete slabs abut existing concrete

slabs. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing

concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.

F. Install vapor retarder directly below interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and

seal watertight by taping edges and ends and in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that

would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover as indicated on

structural drawings. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to

minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset

laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with

wire.

3.04 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.

B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.

C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not

be disturbed during concrete placement.

D. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair

with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.

E. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler.

F. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to

Section 07900 for finish joint sealer requirements.

G. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

H. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set

top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

I. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07900.

J. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and

test samples taken.

K. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.

L. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.

M. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade.

04-27-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03300 -5


Buffalo Wild Wings

N. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft.

3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. (CONC1) Unexposed Form Finish: Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately

after removing formwork. Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in

height.

C. (CONC2) Interior Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:

1. Steel trowel surfaces that will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, and thin set ceramic tile.

2. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to

drains at 1:100 nominal. Provide an 8 inch diameter slope area around all floor drains.

E. (CONC3) Exterior Horizontal Concrete Surfaces: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete

sidewalks, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen surface by brooming with fiber-bristle

broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

2. Refer to Section 03351 for hardener / sealer applied to exterior concrete surfaces.

F. Interior Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is

still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections,

and terminations slightly rounded.

G. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations

as shown on Drawings. Steel-trowel surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections,

and terminations slightly rounded.

1. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with

diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Utilize curing methods that are compatible with floor finish installation recommendations and

that are approved by floor finish manufacturer and installer.

B. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from

premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

C. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period

necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.

1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days.

D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:

1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep

continuously moist for not less than three days by water-saturated sand, water-fog spray,

or saturated burlap.

2. Begin final curing after initial curing but before surface is dry.

a. Moisture-retaining cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive.

b. Curing compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate

recommended by manufacturer. Contractor verify compatibility with specified floor

finishes.

3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section

01400.

B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.

C. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance

with specified requirements.

04-27-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03300 -6


Buffalo Wild Wings

D. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete

test cylinders plus one field cured cylinder. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of

each class of concrete placed.

E. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same

conditions as concrete it represents.

F. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C

143/C 143M.

3.08 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor

within 24 hours of test.

B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances

or specified requirements.

C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Owner’s Construction

Manager. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is

identified.

D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction

of Architect for each individual area.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03300 -7


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 03351 - CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER

A. Integral hardener and sealer for exterior application as indicated on the Drawings and

Schedules as (SC), Sealed Concrete.

B. All components and accessories required for a complete installation.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act

1. ADA Slip Fall Resistance Tests

B. Federal VOC Standards for the Concrete Construction Industry.

C. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency.

1. Modified EPA Test Method 300.

D. USDA - United States Department of Agriculture.

E. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

1. AASHTO T 259 Modified - Crack Sealing Capabilities

F. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.

1. ASTM C-666 (Concrete Durability Test)

2. ASTM C-672 (Scaling Resistance)

3. ASTM C-642 (Absorption)

4. ASTM C-779 (Abrasion Resistance)

5. ASTM E-274 (Skid Resistance)

6. ASTM E-1155 (Floor Flatness)

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with Section 01400, Quality Assurance.

B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in Work of the Section with documented experience.

Components to be by one manufacturer. Manufacturer to provide a list of installations of similar

scope and level of quality.

C. Installer: Companies specializing in Work of this Section with documented experience.

D. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. Review methods and

procedures related to installation including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss conditions of concrete and other preparatory work performed under

other contracts.

2. In addition to the Contractor and the installer, arrange for the attendance of installers

affected by the Work, The Owner's representative, the Architect.

E. The Contractor to verify special conditions required for the installation of the system.

F. The Contractor to notify the Architect of any discrepancies.

G. Materials to comply with all applicable V.O.C. standards

H. Provide as a complete system. Refer to schedules.

I. Discoloration and odors are unacceptable.

04-27-11 CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER

03351 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate the work with concrete slab placement and curing.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty.

1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during the warranty period,

or replace with new materials/components, at no expense to Owner.

2. Length of warranty to be scheduled by the Owner from manufacturer's standard warranties.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. (SC) Exterior Concrete Hardener / Sealer.

1. Chemtec International; Product ChemTec One: www.concretesealer.net.

2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct

conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. Do not proceed until

unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. Examine substrates surfaces, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

C. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surfaces to be treated to meet manufacturers product requirements.

B. New Concrete: Clean surfaces to remove loose and foreign matter that could interfere with

application or performance of products. Allow surfaces to dry completely before beginning

application.

1. The surfaces of the concrete to be clean and free of foreign material, such as grease and

coatings, that would prevent the product from penetrating into the concrete.

2. Acid washing of concrete is unacceptable.

3. Concrete to be completely dry before start of application.

C. Existing Concrete:

1. Clean all surfaces so that they are water permeable.

2. Strip off coatings, sealers, paint or other contaminant that would prevent the process from

penetrating into the concrete.

3. Acid washing of concrete is unacceptable.

4. Concrete to be completely dry before start of application.

D. Protect adjacent and underlying surfaces by masking or by other means.

1. Protect asphaltic and mastic type surfaces from spillage and heavy overspray.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install at locations as indicated, to comply with final shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions

and recommendations for application and coverage.

04-27-11 CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER

03351 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

B. Materials to be premixed and ready to use. Mixing and agitation to be in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Method of application to be by pouring, pumping or spraying. Equipment to be recommended by

manufacturer.

D. Test application: Contractor to treat an area and textures of the installation to establish physical

and visual effects of application and absorption level to establish coverage rates.

E. Install when concrete surface temperatures comply with manufacturer's recommended minimum

standards.

F. When the work cannot be completed in one application, location where application is stopped to

be noted and clearly marked.

G. Application on exterior concrete surfaces.

1. Substrates to be brushed, finished, and fully cured.

2. Apply sealer in two applications at manufacturer's recommended rate with a minimum of 4

to 6 hours between applications.

3. Surface to be saturated with material.

4. Puddle areas should be pushed over to dryer areas. Areas that dry prematurely to have

additional formula brushed around surface until absorption is complete. Re-spraying is

acceptable.

3.04 CURING

A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Allow a minimum period of 12 hours where no

water is allowed on the surface. Period of time starting after completion of last application.

B. Flush surfaces with fresh water, approximately 24 hours after the last application has dried, to

prevent any un-reacted material that may be on the surface from becoming slick at the first rain.

D. Do not allow concrete to freeze for 24 hours after installation.

E. Wait for a minimum of 48 hours prior to application of joint sealants, traffic paints, and/or asphalt

overlays.

3.05 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Immediately upon completion of installation, clean surfaces.

C. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation upon completion of

work and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition.

D. Dispose of waste properly per federal, state or local environmental regulations when required.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installation throughout construction process until date of final completion.

B. Provide protection for the installation, ensuring satisfactory operating condition at completion of

Project.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER

03351 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Mortar for masonry.

B. Grout for masonry.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

SECTION 04065 - MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT

A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Installation of mortar and grout.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements For Masonry Structures; American

Concrete Institute International.

B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute

International.

C. ASTM C 143 - Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.

D. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

E. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

F. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.

G. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.

H. ASTM C 387 - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and

Concrete

I. ASTM C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.

J. ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.

K. ASTM C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of

Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.

L. ASTM C 1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except

where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents.

1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, from

single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for

each aggregate.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign

matter.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during,

and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during,

and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

04-27-11 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT

04065 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal; standard gray color.

B. Packaged Dry Mortar: ASTM C 387, Type as indicated on the Drawings, using gray color

cement.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144.

E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404.

F. Water: Clean and potable.

2.02 MORTAR COLOR

A. Colored Mortar: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use

in mortar mixes.

1. Colors:

a. LaFarge North America; “Santan”; color to match (FBR1) Face Brick. Refer to Section

04810.

b. Spec Mix; Color No. LM-9327-50 #930; color to match (CMU2) Rock Face Block.

Refer to Section 04810.

2. Mortar Locations:

a. Locations of colored mortar: Used to match Face Brick and Rock Faced Block Units.

b. Natural colored mortar for all other locations.

2.03 MORTAR MIXES

A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Property Specification.

1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S.

2. Engineered masonry: Type S.

3. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type S.

4. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type S.

5. Interior, loadbearing and non-loadbearing masonry: Type S.

2.04 MORTAR MIXING

A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C

270 and in quantities needed for immediate use.

B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.

C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.

D. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing.

E. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two-and-one-half

hours at temperatures under 50 degrees F.

2.04 GROUT MIXES

A. Grout for Engineered Masonry, Bond Beams, Lintels, and Corefill: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout type as indicated below:

a. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less.

b. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476,for specified 28-day compressive

strength, 3000 psi.

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

04-27-11 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT

04065 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

2.05 GROUT MIXING

A. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with

ASTM C 476 for fine and coarse grout.

B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.

C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces.

B. Plug clean-out holes for grouted masonry with block masonry units. Brace masonry to resist

wet grout pressure.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of section(s) in which masonry is specified.

B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids.

C. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches without consolidating grout by rodding.

D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout.

E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.

3.03 GROUTING

A. Low-Lift Grouting:

1. Limit height of grout pours to 60 inches.

2. Limit height of fresh masonry to 60 inches above each grout pour.

3. Pour grout only after vertical and horizontal reinforcing is secured in place using

reinforcement positioners. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured.

4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt pours

for more than 1-1/2 hours.

5. Stop grout pour 1 ½” below the top of masonry unit to form a key with the next pour, except

at tops of walls.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field tests, in accordance with provisions of Section

01400.

B. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C 780 procedures.

1. Test frequency: Two tests for first 10,000 units laid. If acceptable, continue testing at two

tests for every 50,000 units laid.

C. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C 1019 procedures.

1. Test frequency: Three samples for every 50 cubic yards or once per week.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT

04065 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Concrete Block.

B. Clay Facing Brick.

C. Reinforcement and Anchorage.

D. Flashings.

E. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry.

B. Section 04065 - Mortar and Masonry Grout.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American

Concrete Institute International.

B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete

Institute International.

C. ASTM A 82/A 82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.

D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware.

E. ASTM C 90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.

F. ASTM C 216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or

Shale).

G. ASTM C 954 - Specification for Steel Drill Screws.

H. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and

Waterproofing.

I. ASTM E 119 - Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except

where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an

enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If

units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt

and oil.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during,

and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

04-27-11 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during,

and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when

construction is not in progress.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least

three days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left

exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such

masonry.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MASONRY UNITS - GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to

contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units

where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fireresistance

ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent

masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. (CMU1) Standard Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:

1. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, normal weight.

a. Hollow block, as indicated.

b. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, movement joints, headers, bonding,

and other special conditions as indicated or required.

B. (CMU2): Integral Colored Rock Faced Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and

as follows:

1. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, normal weight.

a. Hollow block, as indicated.

b. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, movement joints, headers, bonding,

and other special conditions as indicated or required.

2. Manufacturer: Amcon Block and Precast, Inc., St. Cloud, MN 56304. Tel: 888-251-6030.

www.amconblock.com

3. Color: Custom BWW Blend # RF-526.

4. Colored Mortar: Refer to Section 04065 – Mortar and Masonry Grout.

2.02 BRICK UNITS

A. (FBR1) Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Type FBS, Grade SW.

1. Size: Actual; 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.

2. Special shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units

can be sawn to produce equivalent effect.

3. Manufacturer: Sioux City Brick and Tile Company, Sioux City, Iowa 51102.

Tel: 712-258-7571. www.siouxcitybrick.com

4. Color and Texture: Toasted Fine Art Velour.

5. Colored Mortar: Refer to Section 04065 – Mortar and Masonry Grout.

2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Mortar and grout: As specified in Section 04065.

04-27-11 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors:

1. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com

2. Heckmann Building Products, Inc: www.heckmannbuildingprods.com

3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com

4. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com

5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Reinforcing Steel: As indicated on the Drawings.

C. Wire Positioners: Provide 9 gage wire unless noted otherwise.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

a. Dur-O-Wal: D/A 811 and D/A 816.

b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: RB and RB-Twin.

c. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: No. 3401 and No. 3402.

D. Joint Reinforcement: Single wythe, truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip

galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483

inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of

mortar coverage on each exposure.

E. Wall Ties: Corrugated formed sheet metal, 7/8 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, hot dip galvanized

to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2

inch of mortar coverage from masonry face.

F. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between

masonry veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

1. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch thick, designed for fastening to structural backup

through sheathing by two fasteners.

2. Wire ties: triangular shape, 0.1875 inch thick.

3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 2 inches.

G. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon-steel

drill point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except

manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 10 diameter by length

required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Stainless Steel SX Fastener.

b. ITW Buildex; Scots long life Teks.

2.05 THRU-WALL FLASHING

A. Thru-Wall Flashing: Copper-Laminated Flashing, 3-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet bonded between 2

layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. www.abpnow.com

b. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper Fabric Thru-Wall Flashing.

www.dur-o-wal.com

c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing. www.h-b.com

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; 4

inch wide by maximum lengths available.

B. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I ("No.15") asphalt felt.

C. Weeps: Cotton rope.

04-27-11 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

D. Cavity Mortar Diverter: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh blocks, sized to fill bottom of

wall cavity and suspend mortar droppings above weep/cavity vents to allow cavity drainage.

1. Provide system manufactured by Mortar Net or CavClear.

E. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.

B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.

C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building

structure provides permanent bracing.

3.03 COURSING

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform

thickness.

C. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Bond: Running.

2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.

3. Mortar Joints: 3/8”, Concave.

D. Brick Units:

1. Bond: Running.

2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches.

3. Mortar Joints: 3/8”, Concave.

3.04 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other

work.

B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.

C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.

D. Interlock intersections and external corners.

E. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped

edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.

3.05 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS

A. Install weeps in veneer walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above thru-wall flashing.

B. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended

by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents.

04-27-11 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal

joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.

B. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.

3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY

A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.

3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER

A. Stud Back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer

at maximum 16 inches on center vertically and 24 inches on center horizontally. Place

additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of

anchors is 8 inches on center.

3.09 MASONRY FLASHINGS

A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all

locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.

1. Extend flashing full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches into adjacent masonry

or turn up at least 4 inches to form watertight pan at non-masonry construction.

2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashing.

B. Extend flashing to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry.

3.10 LINTELS

A. Install loose steel lintels over openings.

3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.

3.12 BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work

and furnished under other sections.

B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.

C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid

with grout.

1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.

3.13 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.

B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

3.14 PROTECTION

A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that

are subject to damage by construction activities.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

04810 -5


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Structural steel framing members.

B. Base plates.

C. Grouting under base plates.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05210 - Steel Joists.

SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

B. Section 05310 - Steel Deck: Support framing for small openings in deck.

C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.

B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of

Steel Construction, Inc.

C. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.

D. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

E. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless.

F. ASTM A 108: Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon, Cold-Finished.

G. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile

Strength.

H. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi

Minimum Tensile Strength.

I. ASTM A 500: Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural

Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

J. ASTM A 563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.

K. ASTM A 992/A 992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.

L. ASTM C 1107/C 1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout

(Nonshrink).

M. ASTM E 164 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments.

N. ASTM F 436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.

O. ASTM F 959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators

for Use with Structural Fasteners.

P. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;

American Welding Society.

Q. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society.

R. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings.

S. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

04-27-11 STRUCTURAL STEEL

05120 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, cuts, openings,

attachments, and fasteners.

2. Indicate connections including connections not specifically detailed.

3. Indicate cambers and loads.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.

Identify pre-tensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.

5. Indicate welds by standard AWS A2.4 symbols, distinguishing between shop and field

welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.

C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within

the previous 12 months.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual."

B. Comply with Section 10 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for

architecturally exposed structural steel.

C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

D. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a record of

successful in-service performance.

E. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a record of successful

in-service performance.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off

ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel

members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or

overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or

structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint

and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are

compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction

without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and

directions for installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel Angles, Plates, Channels, S Shapes, M Shapes, and HP Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel W Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

C. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. (Fy = 46 ksi)

D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Finish black and galvanized, as indicated. (Fy = 35 ksi)

04-27-11 STRUCTURAL STEEL

05120 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

E. Shear Stud Connectors: Fabricate from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars.

F. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade A.

G. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1,

medium carbon, plain.

H. Anchor Rods: ASTM A 36.

I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

J. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,

cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7000 psi.

a. Conspec: “Enduro 50 Grout”.

b. Euclid: "Euco N-S Grout".

c. L & M: "Duragrout".

d. Sonneborn: "Sonogrout 10k".

e. Five Star Products, Inc.: "Five Star Grout".

f. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.: Certi-Vex Grout #1000.

K. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of

authorities having jurisdiction.

L. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC

limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate

according to AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.

2. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

3. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming

operations.

4. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.

2.03 FINISH

A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 7 and SP2 or SP3.

B. Immediately after surface preparation, shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime

surfaces that will be field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted with slipcritical

connectors.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of shop-bolted connections in accordance

with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325..

1. Visually inspect 100 percent of connections to ensure that all plies of connected parts are

in complete contact.

B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all shop-welded connections and test 100 percent of full

penetration welds using the following:

1. Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E 164.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may

properly proceed.

04-27-11 STRUCTURAL STEEL

05120 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural

steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in

intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,

connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

3.02 ERECTION

A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings

and Bridges".

B. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise

specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with AISC

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325.

C. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.

D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in

contact with concrete.

E. Grout solidly between column base plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's

instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45

degrees.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section

01400.

B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections as stated in

Section 05120, Article 2.04.

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections and test welds as stated in

Section 05120, Article 2.04.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 STRUCTURAL STEEL

05120 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 05210 – STEEL JOISTS

PART 1—GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Open web steel joists.

B. Joist accessories.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05120 – Structural Steel.

B. Section 05310 - Steel Deck.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Welding Society, (AWS):

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M-02: Structural Welding Code – Steel.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 36/A 36M: Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

2. ASTM A 307: Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.

C. The Society for Protective Coatings, (SSPC):

1. SSPC-Paint 15: Paint Specification No. 15: Steel Joist Shop Primer.

2. SSPC-SP 2: Surface Preparation Specification No. 2: Hand Tool Cleaning

D. Steel Joist Institute, (SJI):

1. SJI "Standard Specification, Load Tables, and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist

Girders,".

2. SJI "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders".

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists.

Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, extensions, joist accessories; splice

and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.

1. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction.

2. Indicate welds by standard AWS A2.4 symbols, distinguishing between shop and field

welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.

C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within

the previous 12 months.

D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that joists comply with

requirements.

E. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying

with applicable standard specifications and load tables of SJI "Specifications."

1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for

designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.

B. SJI Specifications: Comply with standard specifications in SJI's "Specifications" that are

applicable to types of joists indicated.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding

Code - Steel."

04-27-11 STEEL JOISTS

05210 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."

B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and

handling.

PART 2—PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel: Comply with SJI "Specifications" for web and steel-angle chord members.

B. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head

bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.

D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.02 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web

Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI "Specifications," with steel-angle top and bottom chord members,

underslung ends, and parallel top chord.

1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists.

B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds,

and methods used in correcting welding work.

C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.

D. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI Type S top-chord extensions where

indicated, complying with SJI "Specifications."

E. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI Type R extended ends where indicated,

complying with SJI "Specifications."

F. Do not camber joists.

G. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist

slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.

2.03 JOIST ACCESSORIES

A. Bridging: Fabricate as indicated and according to SJI "Specifications." Furnish additional

erection bridging if required for stability.

B. Fabricate steel bearing plates with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses as indicated.

Shop prime paint.

C. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist

manufacturer to complete joist installation.

2.04 PRIMERS

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance

requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.

04-27-11 STEEL JOISTS

05210 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

2.05 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING

A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and

accessories.

B. Apply 1 coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous,

dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick.

PART 3—EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.

B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting

construction according to SJI "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations,

and requirements in this Section.

1. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.

2. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that

joists are stabilized during construction.

3. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads

have been applied.

C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding

sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and

procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting

welding work.

D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts in locations indicated.

E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are

applied.

F. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section

01400.

B. Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolted connections will be visually inspected.

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in

compliance with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified

requirements.

04-27-11 STEEL JOISTS

05210 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.04 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or re-prime field

connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting

structural steel, and accessories.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2.

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 STEEL JOISTS

05210 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Roof deck.

SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK

B. Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 10 inches.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel.

B. Section 05210 - Steel Joists: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,

Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened.

B. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society

C. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; American Welding Society.

D. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; The Society for Protective Coatings.

E. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement,

pertinent details, and accessories.

C. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and

finishes.

D. Certificates: Certify that products furnished meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within

the previous 12 months.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a Professional

Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with a

record of successful in-service performance.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and

handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a

waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

04-27-11 STEEL DECK

05310 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Steel Deck:

1. United Steel Deck , Inc: www.njb-united.com.

2. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com.

3. Wheeling Corrugating Co: www.wheelingcorrugating.com.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 STEEL DECK

A. Roof Deck: Wide Rib (Type B) Roof deck:

1. Non-galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Grade 3.

2. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and phosphatized

substrate.

3. Structural Properties:

a. Section modulus: SDI minimum for type of deck shown on Drawings.

b. Span Design: 3 span minimum.

4. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: Refer to Drawings for gauge.

5. Nominal Height: 1-1/2 inch.

6. Profile: Wide Rib, Type B.

7. Formed Sheet Width: 36 inch.

8. Side Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened. Provide #10 TEK fasteners.

9. End Joints: Lapped, welded, 4” minimum end lap.

2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1.

B. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping.

C. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities

having jurisdiction.

1. Primer Color: Gray.

D. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 inch thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck.

2.04 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES

A. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips and cover plates, 22 gage thick sheet steel;

of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck.

B. Roof Sump Pans: 14 gage sheet steel, flat bottom, sloped sides, recessed 1-1/2 inches below

roof deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches wide, sealed watertight.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align

and level.

B. On steel supports provide minimum 1-1/2 inch bearing.

C. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports as indicated on the

Drawings.

D. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3.

04-27-11 STEEL DECK

05310 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

E. At deck openings from 6 inches to 10 inches in size, provide 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch steel angle

reinforcement. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each

side of opening and fusion weld or mechanically attach to deck at each flute.

F. Where deck changes direction, install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same

thickness as deck. Fusion weld 12 inches on center maximum.

G. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and

angle flashings to close openings.

H. Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam

cell closures.

I. Position roof drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck

flute.

J. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned

areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Welded Connections: Visually inspect 100 percent of connections to ensure that all plies of

connected parts are in complete contact.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 STEEL DECK

05310 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

A. Formed steel stud exterior wall framing and bracing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies.

B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel.

C. Section 05310 - Steel Deck.

D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud framing.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members; American Iron and Steel Institute

B. AISI SG-971 - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American

Iron and Steel Institute

C. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware

D. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products.

E. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

F. ASTM C 955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,

Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and

Metal Plaster Bases.

G. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society.

H. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for

Protective Coatings.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish,

product criteria, limitations.

C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacing, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal

framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging,

splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within

the previous 12 months.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with requirements of AISI

North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

04-27-11 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

05400 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during

delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid

condensation.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the drawings.

B. Coordinate work of this section with the placement of components within the stud framing

system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FRAMING SYSTEM

A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips,

fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.

2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Studs and Track: ASTM C 955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched

web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height.

1. Gage and depth: As indicated on the drawings.

2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M G90/Z275 coating.

B. Joists and Purlins: Fabricated from ASTM A 653/A 653M steel sheet, with G90/Z275 hot dipped

galvanized coating.

1. Gage and depth: As indicated on the drawings.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions

encountered; finish to match framing components.

B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed Sheet Steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered;

finish to match framing components.

C. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with

VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Sill Sealer: Closed-cell polyethylene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's

standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.04 FASTENERS

A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A

153/A 153M.

B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated and Drilled expansion bolts.

C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1.

2.05 SHOP FABRICATED ASSEMBLIES

A. Shop fabricate metal framing to the greatest extent possible.

B. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with

connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,

manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.

2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

04-27-11 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

05400 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, or riveting as

standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and

quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw

penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw

fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

C. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection

stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF FRAMING

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and Drawings.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with

connections securely fastened.

C. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of

foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.

D. Install studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted.

E. Install studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design requirements.

F. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.

Independently frame both sides of joints.

G. Install insulation, specified in Section 07212 in built-up exterior framing members, such as

headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion

of framing work.

H. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch.

B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/8 inch.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

05400 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Shop fabricated miscellaneous metal items.

B. Custom stainless steel fabrications

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.

B. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

B. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless.

C. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products.

D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware.

E. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi

Minimum Tensile Strength.

G. ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa

Tensile Strength (Metric).

H. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

I. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

J. ASTM A 666-03: Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,

Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.

K. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;

American Welding Society.

L. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society.

M. OSHA 29 CFR Standard 1910.27 - Fixed Ladders; Occupational Safety and Health Standards.

N. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings.

O. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for

Protective Coatings.

1.04 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for

installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral

anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in

time for installation.

04-27-11 METAL FABRICATIONS

05500 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise

indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.02 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight, (Schedule 40), black finish.

E. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), with G90/Z275 galvanized

coating.

F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A

153M where connecting galvanized components.

G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities

having jurisdiction.

I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with

VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain

structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius

of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on

exposed surfaces.

C. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or

welds where possible.

E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,

and similar items.

G. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located;

consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.

H. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related

components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted

otherwise.

2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS

A. Exterior patio guardrail/fence: Galvanized steel tube and plate materials as indicated on

Drawings.

04-27-11 METAL FABRICATIONS

05500 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

B. RTU roof reinforcement angle frames.

C. Bent, welded steel bar brackets for toilet room lavatory countertops.

D. Steel half-wall reinforcement posts and anchors.

E. Steel Roof Access Ladder: Unless otherwise indicated fabricate steel ladder as follows.

1. Stringers (Side rails): 3 inches by 3/8 inch steel bars with eased edges.

2. Rungs: 3/4 inch diameter smooth steel rods at 12 inches on center. Fit rungs in centerline

of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth and flush on outer rail faces.

3. Brackets: 3 inches by 3/8 inch bent steel plate to form a “U” bracket welded to stringers. In

locations as indicted on Drawings, but not more than 6 feet on center. Brackets to be

bolted to wall with two bolts per bracket. Coordinate locations of blocking.

4. Center line of rungs minimum 7 inches from wall.

5. Width: 1’-8” inches between stringers.

6. Finish: Factory prime painted. Field finished under Section 09900.

7. Comply with applicable OSHA requirements for steel ladders.

F. Keg Storage Fencing and Gates:

1. Fence Fabric: Chain link fence fabric, 2 inch mesh, 9 gauge galvanized coated wire.

2. Posts, Rails and Braces: Nominal 2 inch diameter galvanized steel pipe. Provide

galvanized components for attaching fence fabric, top caps, 4” by 4” x 1/4” galvanized steel

base plates for posts and 5/8” stainless steel anchor bolts.

3. Gates: Fabricate single swing gates as indicated on Drawings with forked type latch for

padlock, 3 hinges per gate and cane bolts. All components galvanized.

4. Hardware: Padlock by Section 08710 Door Hardware.

5. Accessories: Provide other components required for complete installation.

G. Trash Enclosure Gates:

1. Gate Frame: 2” x 2” x 1/8”, ASTM A500 structural steel tubing. Continuously weld tube

connections and grind welds smooth.

2. Corrugated Metal Panels: 18 gauge, 1-1/2” deep, galvanized steel roof deck.

3. Steel Casters: Provide 4” diameter steel casters capable of carrying the gate load, 1 per

gate. Casters to be welded to bottom of gates at locations indicated on Drawings.

4. Hardware: Fabricate gate hinges in configuration as indicated on Drawings. 2 hinges per

gate. Provide cane bolts welded to frame, 1 per gate.

H. Steel Channel Support System: Unistrut P1001HS. As indicated on Structural Drawings for

support of 1/2" diameter threaded rods. Refer to detail 7/S202.

I. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and

recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for

each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single

unit where indicated.

J. Custom Stainless Steel Fabrications: Provide 18 gauge, Type 304 brushed stainless steel wall

angles, wall channels, trim and base components as indicated on Drawings. Hem edges, round

off corners and adhesively apply in locations as indicated.

2.04 FINISHES - STEEL

A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.

B. Prime paint all steel items with one coat of fabricators standard shop primer.

C. Galvanizing of non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123/A 123M

requirements.

04-27-11 METAL FABRICATIONS

05500 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.

B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.

C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.

D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.

E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until

completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

D. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.

E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except

surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

F. Coordinate with other related trades and suppliers for acceptable dimensions and tolerances.

G. Install ladders in accordance with manufacturers instructions using manufacturer supplied

brackets and accessories.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF BOLLARDS

A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards. Place concrete in

bollard and vibrate or tamp for consolidation, round off concrete at top of bollard. Support and

brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 METAL FABRICATIONS

05500 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Dimensional Framing Lumber.

B. Roof and Wall Sheathing.

C. Wood nailers and curbs for roofing and items installed on roof.

D. Concealed wood blocking for support of equipment, toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets,

wood trim, and shelving.

E. Miscellaneous wood nailers and furring strips.

F. Preservative treatment of wood.

G. Fire retardant treatment of wood.

H. Fiber Cement Siding Panels, Soffit Panels and Trim.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware.

B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

C. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure

Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association.

D. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber -- Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American

Wood-Preservers' Association.

E. AWPA C27 - Plywood -- Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-

Preservers' Association.

F. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood-

Preservers' Association.

G. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology

(Department of Commerce).

H. DOC PS 2: Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels.

I. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology

(Department of Commerce).

J. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies.

B. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSCaccredited

testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA

standards.

04-27-11 ROUGH CARPENTRY

06100 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air

circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. General:

1. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).

2. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.

3. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.

B. Framing Lumber: 2” x 4” or larger; No. 2 Southern Pine, No. 2 Douglas Fir Larch or equivalent.

C. Joists and Rafters: Select Grade, Southern Pine, Douglas Fir Larch or equivalent.

D. Roof Edge Bevel Blocking:

1. Provide redwood, cedar or pressure treated material.

E. Miscellaneous Blocking, Furring, and Nailers:

1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.

2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.

2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. (SHTG-1) Wall Sheathing: The contractor has the option to use one of the following wall

sheathing panels.

1. Plywood Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 1, C-D, exposure 1, structural 1.

2. Oriented Strand Board Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 2, exposure 1, structural 1.

3. Nominal Thickness: 1/2 inch.

B. (SHTG-2) Plywood Roof Sheathing: DOC PS 1, C-D, exterior, structural 1.

1. Nominal Thickness: 3/4 inch.

2. Edge Detail: Tongue and Groove.

C. (SHTG-3) Concealed Plywood: DOC PS 1, C-C Plugged, exposure 1.

1. Nominal Thickness: as indicated on drawings.

D. (SHTG-4) Exposed Plywood: DOC PS 1, A-D, interior grade.

1. Nominal Thickness: as indicated on drawings.

E. (SHTG-5) Electrical Panel Boards: APA rated sheathing, fire retardant treated.

1. Nominal Thickness: 3/4 inch.

2.04 FIBER CEMENT SIDING AND TRIM

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. James Hardie Building Products, Inc., Mission Viejo, CA; www.jameshardie.com

2. Substitutions: Not permitted.

04-27-11 ROUGH CARPENTRY

06100 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

B. Materials:

1. (FC SIDING) Siding Panels: HardiePanel Vertical Siding.

a. Thickness: 5/16” thick.

b. Panel Size: Provide panel sizes to minimize joints and to provide acceptable batten

pattern.

c. Texture: Smooth.

d. Finish: Primed Finish for field painting under Section 09900.

2. (FC SOFFIT) Soffit Panels: HardieSoffit.

a. Thickness: 1/4" thick.

b. Texture: Smooth.

c. Finish: Primed Finish for field painting under Section 09900.

3. (FC TRIM) Trim Boards: HardieTrim.

a. Thickness: 1” thick.

b. Texture: Smooth.

c. Finish: Primed Finish for field painting under Section 09900.

C. Installation: Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's written installation

instructions.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for exterior, high

humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

B. Metal Framing Connectors: Manufactured by The Simpson Co.

1. Refer to Structural Drawings for specific components.

C. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's

standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

D. Membrane Underlayment: 40 mil. thick, self-adhering sheet underlayment for high temperature

applications.

1. Grace Construction Products: Grace Ice and Water Shield HT.

2. Location: Use at Entry Canopy Roof over sheathing.

2.06 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System

for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific

applications.

B. (FT) Fire Retardant Treated Lumber:

1. Interior Type A: AWPA Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H (Treatment C20

for lumber and C27 for plywood), low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically

treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of

25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant combustion

when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes.

a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber

and 15 percent for plywood.

b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated .

c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may

become wet.

04-27-11 ROUGH CARPENTRY

06100 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

C. (PT) Preservative Pressure Treated Lumber, Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC3B,

Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft

retention.

1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.

3. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and

fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.

Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for

attaching other construction.

B. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,

specialty items, and trim.

C. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be

exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members.

Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise

indicated.

D. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating

lapping side members.

E. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings.

3.02 MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Apply 1 layer of membrane underlayment over entire canopy area that is to receive aluminum

composite panels. Lap joints 6 inches.

3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts,

complying with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 ROUGH CARPENTRY

06100 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Installation of finish millwork items furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor.

B. Adjustable Shelf Hardware.

C. Hardware and attachment accessories.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 06110 - Rough Carpentry.

B. Section 06410 - Custom Cabinets.

C. Section 06415 - Countertops.

D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

E. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Painting and finishing of millwork items.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack materials flat

with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation within

and around stacks and under temporary coverings.

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not have materials delivered or install interior finish carpentry

materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and

nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative

humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS

A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS

A. (WD1) Select White Maple: maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of

quality suitable for transparent finish. Furnished by Millwork Vendor for installation under this

Section.

B. (WD2) Southern Pine: No. 1, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of

quality suitable for intended use.

2.03 ADJUSTABLE SHELF HARDWARE

A. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Brackets: Knape & Vogt, No. KV87-36” – White.

B. Adjustable Shelf Brackets: Knape & Vogt, No. KV187-18” – White.

C. Accessories: Provide bracket manufacturers standard shelf rests as applicable for installation

indicated on drawings. Finish: White.

D. Shelves: Furnished by Millwork Vendor.

04-27-11 FINISH CARPENTRY

06200 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

2.04 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Cork Board: 1/4 inch thick fine grained cork for adhesive application. Furnished by Millwork

Vendor.

2.05 ADHESIVE

A. Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI to suit application.

2.06 FASTENERS

A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type,

size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,

concealed where possible.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Lumber for Shimming, Blocking: Southern Pine.

B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type.

C. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color.

2.08 HARDWARE

A. Refer to Drawings for special hardware items.

B. Provide incidental hardware as required.

2.09 FABRICATION

A. To greatest degree possible, shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage

through building openings.

B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.

Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.

C. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit

corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate

counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.

2.10 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.

B. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding

surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.

C. Finish work in accordance with WIC Manual of Millwork, Section 5, System #5 - Catalyzed

Polyurethane, Clear.

D. Seal and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Spray or brush apply.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use

concealed shims where necessary for alignment.

B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use

additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.

04-27-11 FINISH CARPENTRY

06200 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

C. Cope all inside corners, miter all outside corners.

D. Countersink fasteners, apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth

and flush.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF ADJUSTABLE SHELF HARDWARE

A. Install standards for adjustable shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions,

spaced not more than 36 inches o.c. and within 6 inches of end of shelves. Fasten to framing

members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors.

B. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and

reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports.

C. Fasten shelves to brackets to comply with bracket manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 FINISH CARPENTRY

06200 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 06410 - CUSTOM CABINETS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Installation of custom cabinetry and millwork items furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor as

follows:

1. Specially fabricated cabinet units.

2. Adjustable cabinet shelving.

3. Cabinet hardware.

4. Factory finishing.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 06415 - Countertops: Plastic laminate and solid surface countertops.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard.

B. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard.

C. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use.

D. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural

Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada.

E. GSA CID A-A-1936 - Adhesive, Contact, Neoprene Rubber; Federal Specifications and

Standards.

F. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood

Plywood & Veneer Association.

G. NHLA G-101 - Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress; National

Hardwood Lumber Association.

H. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology

(Department of Commerce).

I. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology

(Department of Commerce).

J. WI (MAN) - Manual of Millwork; Woodwork Institute.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint

details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes.

C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.

D. Millwork Vendor is contracted direct by Owner. Millwork Vendor will submit shop drawings to

General Contractor for dimension verification.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards

Illustrated, Custom quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum three years of documented experience.

04-27-11 CUSTOM CABINETS

06410 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Protect units from moisture damage.

1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions

in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS

A. Custom cabinetry and millwork items furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor.

2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS

A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS

A. Softwood Lumber: NIST PS 20; Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural

Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; average moisture content of 4-9 percent; species as

follows:

1. Exposed Surfaces: Species Pine.

2. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Species Pine.

3. Concealed Surfaces: Species Pine.

B. Hardwood Lumber: NHLA; Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork

Quality Standards Illustrated, Grade III/Economy; average moisture content of 4-9 percent;

species as follows:

1. Exposed Surfaces: (WD1) Select White Maple.

2. Concealed Surfaces: Poplar.

2.04 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Softwood Faced Plywood:

1. Exposed Surfaces: NIST PS 1; APA A-A Grade, plain-sliced white pine face veneer,

Interior rated adhesives, core of particleboard, medium density fiberboard, or engineered

combination, thickness as indicated.

2. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: NIST PS 1; APA A-B Grade, rotary cut Douglas fir face veneer,

Interior rated adhesives, core of medium density fiberboard, engineered combination, fireretardant

treated particleboard, or veneer, thickness as indicated.

3. Concealed Surfaces: NIST PS 1; APA B-B Grade, rotary cut Douglas fir face veneer,

Interior rated adhesives, core of medium density fiberboard, engineered combination, fireretardant

treated particleboard, or veneer, thickness as required.

B. Hardwood Faced Plywood: HPVA HP-1; graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural

Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, core of veneer; type of glue recommended for specific

application; thickness as required; face veneer as follows:

1. Exposed Surfaces: (WD1) Select White Maple.

C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; medium density industrial type as specified in AWI/AWMAC

Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, composed of wood chips bonded with

moisture resistant adhesive under heat and pressure; sanded faces; thickness as required; use

for components indicated on drawings.

04-27-11 CUSTOM CABINETS

06410 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

D. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWI/AWMAC

Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure

bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as

required.

E. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 1/4 inch

thick, smooth one side (S1S); use for drawer bottoms, dust panels, and other components

indicated on drawings.

2.05 LAMINATE MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Wilsonart International; www.wilsonart.com

B. Plastic Laminate: In accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated, 0.039 inch Post

Forming quality.

1. Color, Pattern, and Surface Textures:

a. (PLAM1): Wilsonart # 1573-60, Frosty White, Matte.

b. (PLAM3): Wilsonart # 1595-60, Black, Matte

C. Laminate Backing Sheet: 0.020 inch Backing Sheet grade, undecorated plastic laminate.

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: GSA CID A-A-1936 contact adhesive.

B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application and as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.

D. Stainless steel legs: 6 inches long, NSF approved for food preparation areas.

E. Grommets: Nominal 3 inch round, black, plastic material for cut-outs, supplied and installed by

GC.

2.07 HARDWARE

A. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using surface mounted metal shelf

standards and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing

adjustments.

1. Product: No. KV 255 and 256 manufactured by Knape & Vogt.

B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard back-mounted system using surface mounted metal shelf

standards and coordinated cantilevered shelf brackets, satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch

spacing adjustments.

1. Product: No. KV 187 and 87 manufactured by Knape & Vogt.

C. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, stainless steel with satin finish, 4 inch centers.

D. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, master keyed, steel with chrome finish.

E. Catches: Magnetic on all cabinets.

F. Hinges: European style concealed type, steel with polished finish. Self-closing.

G. Cup Dispensers: Install cup dispensers furnished by Owner’s Equipment Vendor.

2.08 FABRICATION

A. Coordinate with Owner supplied components and equipment.

B. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit

passage through building openings.

04-27-11 CUSTOM CABINETS

06410 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

C. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.

D. Door Fronts: 3/4 inch thick; overlay style.

E. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for

cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.

F. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with

manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Locate

counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.

G. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.

H. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions.

Prime paint cut edges.

I. Provide grommets in locations as indicated on cabinet drawings.

J. Provide white melamine surface on interior surfaces of closed cabinets, unless otherwise noted

on the Drawings.

K. Provide plastic laminate surfaces on exposed surface of cabinets and interiors of open shelf

cabinets normally exposed to view.

L. Provide stainless steel legs on laminate casework located at food preparation areas as detailed.

2.09 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.

B. For opaque finishes, apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and sand smooth.

C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding

surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.

D. Finish work in accordance with WIC Manual of Millwork, Section 5, System #5 - Catalyzed

Polyurethane, Clear.

E. Seal and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Spray or brush apply.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.

B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.

C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.

D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not

use additional overlay trim for this purpose.

E. Secure cabinets to wall and floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust installed work.

B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

04-27-11 CUSTOM CABINETS

06410 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 CUSTOM CABINETS

06410 -5


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 06415 - COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Installation of countertops for manufactured casework furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor.

B. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use.

B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

C. ISSFA-2 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Solid Surface

Fabricators Association.

D. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint

details, fastening methods, and schedule of finishes.

C. Millwork Vendor is contracted direct by Owner. Millwork Vendor will submit shop drawings to

General Contractor for dimension verification.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Qualified installer for solid surface materials that is trained and certified

by manufacturer for the installation of the specified products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Countertops furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor.

B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate.

1. Laminate Sheet, Unless Otherwise Indicated: NEMA LD 3 Grade HGS, 0.048 inch nominal

thickness.

a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450,

maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

b. NSF approved for food contact.

c. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20.

d. Surface Color and Pattern: (PLAM2) Wilsonart # 4884-38, Flame Soapstone,

Standard finish.

2. Laminate Backing Sheet: 0.020 inch Backing Sheet grade, undecorated plastic laminate.

3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction.

B. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous

substrate.

1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum.

04-27-11 COUNTERTOPS

06415 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISSFA-2 and NEMA LD

3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and

capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface

coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.

a. NSF approved for food contact.

b. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20.

c. Color and Pattern: (SS1) Corian, Custom BWW color, #PDR AMG24-06-D.

3. Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum.

4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick; square edge.

5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high.

6. Skirts: As indicated on drawings.

2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Medium Density Fiberboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.2.

B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of

materials being joined.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate tops, splashes and sills in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints

flush.

1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.

2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against

cabinet or wall.

3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or

unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.

B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive

sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

D. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, and brackets required and as indicated on

drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Construction Manager of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets

are installed in proper locations.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;

shim where required.

04-27-11 COUNTERTOPS

06415 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board

of 5/8 inch.

C. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces with clear silicone sealant.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.

B. Protect installed products until completion of project.

C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 COUNTERTOPS

06415 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 06605 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS

A. Fiberglass reinforced polyester panel system for adhesive mounting.

B. Moldings, adhesive, and joint sealants.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,

in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under

environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Crane Composites, Inc., (Formerly Kemlite Company), Channahon,

IL. www.cranecomposites.com

2.02 PANEL SYSTEM

A. Plastic Panel System: Factory finished panels, trim, sealant, and accessories.

B. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels (FRP): 0.090 inch thick, USDA approved, textured

surface wall panels with Class III/Class C fire rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E

84.

1. Product: Crane Composities, Glasbord-P, Embossed Class C Wall Panel.

2. Flame Spread:


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Take panels out of cartons and allow to acclimatize to room conditions for at least 48 hours prior

to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

D. Protect existing surfaces from damage due to installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Use the adhesives recommended by the panel manufacturer unless prohibited by local

regulations; obtain manufacturer's approval of alternative adhesives.

C. Install panels continuous from floor to ceiling without horizontal joints.

D. Install continuous bead of silicone sealant in each joint and trim groove and between trim and

adjacent construction, maintaining 1/8 inch expansion space.

E. Avoid contamination of panel faces with adhesives, solvents, or cleaners; clean as necessary

and replace if not possible to repair to original condition.

F. Protect installed products until completion of project.

G. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products after Substantial Completion.

H. Cove base to be installed on top of FRP with no bottom trim. Caulk top of cove to FRP with

clear silicone.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS

06605 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 07100 – SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING

A. Self-Adhering, Sheet Membrane Waterproofing.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03300 – Cast-in-place Concrete.

B. Section 04810 – Unit Masonry Assemblies.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 272: Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich

Constructions.

2. ASTM D 1227: Specification for Emulsified Asphalt used as a Protective Coating for

Roofing.

3. ASTM D 1621: Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

4. ASTM D 1668: Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for Roofing and

Waterproofing.

5. ASTM D 4258: Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating.

6. ASTM D 6135: Practice for Application of Self-Adhering Modified Bituminous

Waterproofing.

B. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA):

1. Waterproofing Manual.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following:

1. Manufacturer's written installation instructions.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary waterproofing materials and primers through one source

from a single manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer for installation of

waterproofing required for this Project.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible

manufacturer's identification.

B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Store in cool, dry place at temperature of not less than 40 degrees F., out of direct sunlight,

and with adequate ventilation.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit waterproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written

instructions.

B. Do not apply waterproofing to damp, frozen, dirty, or dusty surfaces unacceptable to

waterproofing system manufacturer.

04-27-11 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING

07100 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Waterproofing:

1. W.R. Grace & Co.; Bituthene 3000. www.graceconstruction.com

2. American Hydrotech, Inc.; VM 75. www.hydrotechusa.com

3. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRI 860/861. www.carlisle-cww.com

4. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; SealTight Mel-Rol. www.wrmeadows.com

2.02 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING

A. (Waterproofing): Modified Bituminous Sheet of not less than 60-mil thick, self-adhering sheet

consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil thick, polyethylene film with

release liner on adhesive side and formulated for application with primer or surface conditioner.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended

use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.

1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet

waterproofing material.

C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by

manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.

D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low

viscosity.

E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating.

F. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheet strips of same material and thickness as

sheet waterproofing.

G. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended

by waterproofing manufacturer.

H. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9-inch

centers.

I. Protection Board: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced one or

both sides with plastic film, nominal thickness 1/4 inch, with compressive strength of not less

than 8 psi per ASTM D 1621, and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.6 percent per

ASTM C 272.

1. Owens Corning's "Fanfold DWB.

2. Dow Chemical Company's "Protection Board III.

3. Comparable products from other manufacturers.

04-27-11 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING

07100 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface

smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Proceed with waterproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating

work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by

waterproofing manufacturer.

3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide

clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other

contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,

holes, and other voids.

D. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints

and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

E. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.

1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch fillets of liquid

membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows:

a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each direction from corner or

install membrane strip centered over corner.

F. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations

through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are

indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of waterproofing.

B. Install sheet waterproofing according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and

according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135.

C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be

covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Re-prime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

D. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and

maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and

stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.

1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install selfadhering,

modified bituminous sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not

use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F.

E. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and

contraction joints.

F. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashing or ending

in reglets with mastic.

04-27-11 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING

07100 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in sheet waterproofing not complying with requirements.

Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches

beyond repaired areas in all directions.

H. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements;

repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION BOARD

A. Install protection board with butted joints over sheet waterproofing immediately after installation.

Comply with waterproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching

protection board.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect waterproofing and protection board from damage during remainder of construction

period.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING

07100 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 07160 – BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

A. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.

B. Protection board.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03300 – Cast-in-place Concrete.

B. Section 04810 – Unit Masonry Assemblies.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 272: Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural.

2. ASTM D 1227: Specification for Emulsified Asphalt used as a Protective Coating for

Roofing.

3. ASTM D 1621: Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

4. ASTM D 1668: Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for Roofing and

Waterproofing.

B. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA):

1. Waterproofing Manual.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Include recommendations for method of application, primer, number of coats,

coverage or thickness and reinforcing. Submit manufacturer’s technical bulletins and MSDS.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source

from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of

primary materials.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written

instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Dampproofing:

1. BASF Building Systems.

2. Karnak Corporation.

3. W.R. Meadows, Inc.

4. Tamms Industries, Inc.

04-27-11 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

07160 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

2.02 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING

A. (Dampproofing) Emulsified Bituminous Dampproofing: Non-fibered, water-based, non-sag

asphaltic coating designed for spray application on damp substrate and conforming to ASTM D

1227, Type III, Class 1.

1. BASF: Hydrocide 600.

2. W.R. Meadows: Sealmastic Emulsion Type I – Spray Grade.

3. Karnak Corporation: 100AF Non-Fibered Emulsion Dampproofing.

4. Tamms: Dehydratine 75.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as

recommended by manufacturer.

B. Fiber Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.

1. Karnak Corporation: No. 31 Fiberglass Membrane.

2. Sonoshield Reinforcing Fabric by BASF Building Systems.

3. Comparable products from other manufacturers complying with specified requirements.

C. Patching Compound: Fibered mastic of type recommended by dampproofing manufacturer.

D. Protection Board: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced one

or both sides with plastic film, nominal thickness 1/4 inch, with compressive strength of not less

than 8 psi per ASTM D 1621, and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.6 percent per

ASTM C 272.

1. Owens Corning's "Fanfold DWB.

2. Dow Chemical Company's "Protection Board III.

3. Comparable products from other manufacturers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface

smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating

work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being

stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering

and clogging weep holes and drains.

B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and

apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.

C. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other

imperfections.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are

indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.

1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or if required to achieve coverage

indicated.

2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats.

3. Allow 24 hours drying time prior to backfilling or coverage by other materials.

04-27-11 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

07160 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

B. Locations:

1. Foundation Walls: Apply dampproofing to foundation walls where opposite side of wall

faces building interior and other locations indicated on drawings.

a. Apply from finished grade line to 16 inches below building floor line.

b. Extend 12 inches onto intersecting surfaces, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed

to view when Project is completed.

c. Install fiber glass fabric stripping at internal and external corners, changes in plane,

construction joints, cracks, by embedding an 8 inch wide strip of fiber glass fabric in a

heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to

other coats required.

d. Coverage Rate: Apply 2 spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. for first coat

and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat.

2. Cavity Walls: Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior

face of back-up surface on masonry and concrete cavity walls.

a. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties,

and other items that penetrate applied surface.

b. Coverage rate: Apply 1 spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION BOARD

A. Install protection board over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing

material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection board.

1. Support protection board with spot application of adhesive of type recommended by

protection board manufacturer over cured coating.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

07160 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 07212 - BOARD AND BATT INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Batt insulation in exterior wall construction.

B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces, crevices in exterior wall and

roof, and roof and miscellaneous stud spaces.

C. Batt insulation for acoustic insulation in interior partitions.

D. Board Insulation at roof.

E. Board Insulation for exterior foundations.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Supporting construction for batt insulation.

B. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry.

C. Section 07260 – Air and Vapor Barriers.

D. Section 07535 - Mechanically Attached Membrane Roofing.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.

B. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At

750 Degrees C.

C. ASTM C 578 – Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.

D. ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal

Insulation Board.

E. ASTM D 1621 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties Of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

F. ASTM D 1622 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

G. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single

manufacturer.

B. Verify that polyisocyanurate roof insulation is acceptable with roof membrane manufacturer.

Refer to Section 07535.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,

and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written

instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

03/09/10 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION

07212 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS

A. (INSUL1) Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed mineral fiber batt; friction fit, conforming to

the following:

1. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136, except for

facing, if any.

2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings for wall thickness.

3. Facing: Unfaced.

4. Manufacturers:

a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com

b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com

c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com

5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS

A. (INSUL2): Under Slab and Foundation Insulation: Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation, 2”

inch thick, unless noted otherwise, ASTM C 578, Type IV, 30 psi minimum compressive

strength, 1.60 lb/cu. ft., with a flame-spread of 5 and smoke-developed indexes of 45-75:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Diversifoam Products: Certifoam.

b. Dow Chemical: Styrofoam.

c. Owens Corning: Foamular LT30.

B. (INSUL3): Roof Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board to ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class I, Grade

2; rigid, closed cell type, with specially formulated organic/inorganic facers.

1. Long Term Thermal Resistance (ASTM C518): R=6.0 per 1 inch of thickness.

2. Board Size: 48”x48” and 48”x96”.

3. Nominal Product Thickness: 4 inches unless noted otherwise.

4. Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621): minimum 20 psi.

5. Density (ASTM D1622): 2 pcf.

6. Edges: Square.

7. Dimensional Stability: less than 2 percent linear change.

8. Flame Spread (ASTM E84): 25.

9. Provide tapered insulation boards and thicknesses to create tapered areas as indicated on

Roof Plan.

10. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Johns Manville: Enrgy 3 Roof Insulation Board. www.jm.com

b. GAF Materials Corporation: EnergyGuard Roof Insulation Board. www.gaf.com

c. Firestone Building Products: ISO 95+. www.firestonebpco.com

d. Comparable products from other roofing insulation manufacturers that meet or exceed

the specified requirements and are acceptable to the roof membrane manufacturer.

C. Mechanical Fasteners: Screw type, 6 ga. diameter, self-tapping, galvanized steel, sufficient

length to secure anchor system into place and to withstand all super-imposed loads: complete

with 1 1/2 inch diameter 14 ga. thick galvanized steel discs.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and compatible.

B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, sound, free of honeycomb, oil, grease, fins, or other

irregularities.

03/09/10 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION

07212 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.02 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver in original unopened packages and store in enclosed shelter; protect from damage and

exposure to direct sunlight. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from premises.

3.03 BATT INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.

C. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services

within the plane of the insulation.

3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Insulate interior face of exterior concrete foundation, including returns under floor slab as

indicated on the drawings. Provide complete insulation membrane around entire building

whether specifically indicated or not.

B. Mechanically fasten insulation boards to substrate at NRCA, UL or FM required spacing,

whichever is more stringent.

C. Apply insulation boards parallel to roof perimeter edges.

D. Lay second layer of insulation with joints staggered from first layer

E. Lay insulation boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly

to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof.

F. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in same day.

G. Keep insulation a minimum of 3 inches from heat emitting devices, and a minimum 2 inches

from sidewalls.

H. Install after building embankment and granular cushion have been completed and vapor

retarder is in place. Lay insulation in place, edges closely pressed together, against inside face

of foundation beam excavation; returned under floor slab as shown on the drawings. Pour

concrete to cover insulation.

3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.

3.06 CLEAN-UP

A. Upon completion of work of this section, remove related debris from premises.

END OF SECTION

03/09/10 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION

07212 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 07240 – EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

A. Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS), Class PB.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01300 – Administration Requirements: for submittal procedures.

B. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry: for wall framing and sheathing.

C. Section 07620 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

D. Section 07920 – Joint Sealants: Expansion joint and perimeter sealants.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Water Drainable EIFS: A “nonload bearing, water drainage exterior wall cladding system that

consists of a fluid applied water resistive coating applied over sheathing or concrete masonry,

insulation board attached adhesively with notched trowel; an integrally reinforced base coat;

and a textured protective finish coat,” as defined by ASTM C 1397.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C150 – “Spec for Portland Cement”.

2. ASTM C578 – “Spec for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation”.

3. ASTM C 1397 – “Practice for Application of Class PB Exterior Insulation and Finish

Systems”.

4. ASTM C 1481: Guide for Use of Joint Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems

(EIFS).

5. ASTM D 578-00: Specification for Glass Fiber Strands.

6. ASTM D 1784-03: Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and

Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

7. ASTM D 3273: Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior

Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.

8. ASTM D 3274: Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint Films

by Microbial (Fungal or Algal) Growth or Soil and Dirt Accumulation.

9. ASTM E84 – “Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.”

B. EIFS Industry Members Association (EIMA) Standards:

1. EIMA101.01 – Standard Test Method for Freeze-Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation

and Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB (Modified ASTM C67).

2. EIMA 101.02 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Water Penetration of Exterior

Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB, (Modified ASTM E 331).

3. EIMA 101.03 – Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Strength of an

Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS), and Components, Class PB (Modified ASTM

C297).

4. EIMA 101.86 – Standard Test Method for Resistance of Exterior Insulation and Finish

Systems (EIFS), Class PB, to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).

5. EIMA 105.01 – Standard Test Method for Alkali Resistance of Glass Fiber Reinforcing

Mesh for use in Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB.

6. EIMA 300.01 – Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of

Sealants when used with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB.

7. EIMA- Class PB Details - Exterior Insulation and Finish System Class PB Details.

8. EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board.

12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

07240 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

C. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES):

1. ICC-ES AC12: Interim Criteria for Foam Plastic Insulation.

2. ICC-ES AC24: Interim Criteria for Exterior Insulation and Finish System.

3. ICC-ES AC219: Acceptance Criteria for Exterior Insulation and Finish System.

1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. EIFS Performance: Provide a system to comply with the following:

1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and

supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other

in-service conditions.

2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into water-drainage EIFS

and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in

deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and

assemblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish,

and including a means that allows water entering into an EIFS assembly to drain to the

exterior.

B. Class PB EIFS: Provide EIFS having physical properties and structural performance that

comply with the following:

1. Abrasion Resistance: No cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity when tested per

ASTM D 968, Method A.

2. Absorption - Freeze Resistance: No visible deleterious effects and negligible weight loss

after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01.

3. Accelerated Weathering: Five samples per ICC-ES AC219 showing no cracking, checking,

crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, delamination per ASTM G 153.

4. Freeze -Thaw: No surface changes, cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting,

blistering, peeling, or delamination per ICC-ES AC219.

5. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: No growth when tested per ASTM D 3273 and

evaluated according to ASTM D 3274.

6. Salt-Spray Resistance: No deleterious affects when tested according to ICC-ES AC219.

7. Tensile Adhesion: No failure in EIFS, adhesive, base coat, or finish coat when tested per

EIMA 101.03.

8. Water Penetration: No water penetration into the plane of the base coat to expandedpolystyrene

board interface per EIMA 101.02.

9. Water Resistance: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or

delamination after testing for 14 days per ASTM D 2247.

10. Wind-Driven-Rain Resistance: When applicable with stud framed wall substrates; resist

wind-driven rain according to ICC-ES AC219.

11. Impact Resistance: Tested per EIMA 101.86; and meeting or exceeding the following:

12. Standard Impact Resistance: 25 to 49 inch-lb.

13. High Impact Resistance: 90 to 150 inch-lb.

14. Drainage: According to ICC-ES AC235.

15. Structural Performance Testing: EIFS assembly and components to comply with ICC-

ES AC219 when tested per ASTM E 330.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Installer’s Certification:

1. List of at least 3 successfully completed EIFS projects of similar complexity, completed

within the last 2 years.

2. Installer’s approved and current Applicator’s Certificate.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Installer, certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install

manufacturer's system using trained workers.

12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

07240 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from

sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components.

C. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following

fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system

components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of

applicable testing agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide insulation board, adhesives, base coats, and

finish coats with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or

less, per ASTM E 84.

2. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS when tested according to NFPA 268.

3. Potential Heat: Acceptable level when tested according to NFPA 259.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packaging with labels

intact clearly identifying products.

B. Inspect products for damage and notify manufacturer of any discrepancies. Do not use

damaged or unsatisfactory materials.

C. Store materials inside under cover protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface

contamination, aging, damaging temperatures, construction traffic and other causes.

1. Do not store at less than 40 deg. F.

2. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground.

1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Comply with exterior insulation finish system manufacturer’s requirements

for temperatures and environmental conditions before during and after application.

1. Do not apply EIFS system unless the ambient temperature is above 40 deg. F and rising at

the time of installation and remains so for 24 hours following installation.

2. Do not apply EIFS system materials to substrates whose temperature is below 40 deg. F.

3. Do not apply EIFS system during inclement weather unless appropriate protection is

employed.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of EIFS with related Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall

assemblies, including sheathing, flashing, trim, joint sealants, aluminum framing systems, and

doors, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, corrosion, moisture, and other

causes. Do not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and barrier coating of EIFS.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and System:

1. Dryvit System Inc.: (Outsulation MD System).

2. Senergy, Inc.: (Senerflex Channeled Adhesive System).

3. STO Corporation.: (StoTherm Essence Next).

4. Parex Inc.: (Standard Water Master System).

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Provide water-resistive coating, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing

meshes, base- and finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one

another and with substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project.

12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

07240 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

B. Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use

as water/weather-resistive barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and

performance criteria of ICC-ES AC212.

1. Sheathing Joint Tape: Type recommended by EIFS manufacturer for sealing joints

between and penetrations through sheathing.

C. Drainage Strip/Track: Manufacturer’s standard PVC track or strip to provide drainage of system.

Coordinate component selected with specific details indicated on Drawings.

D. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use,

compatible with substrate, and complying with the following:

1. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and fillers

specified for base coat.

E. Insulation Board: Molded, rigid cellular polystyrene insulation board complying with

ASTM C 578, Type I; EIFS manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline

Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for most stringent requirements

for material performance and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible

variations, and the following:

1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less

than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results.

2. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, per

ASTM E 84.

3. Dimensions: Provide insulation boards in thickness indicated, but not more than 4 inches

thick or less than thickness allowed by ASTM C 1397.

4. Foam Shapes: Provide with profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings.

F. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for

compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multi-end strands with retained

mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. per EIMA 105.01; complying with ASTM D 578

and the following requirements for minimum weight:

1. Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd.

2. High-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 15 oz./sq. yd.

3. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd.

4. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd.

G. Base Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following:

1. Formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or natural color;

and manufacturer's standard 100% acrylic adhesive designed for use with portland

cement.

2. Materials to be shipped pre-measured for job-site mixing.

H. Tinted Base-Coat Primer (provide if required by manufacturer): EIFS manufacturer's standard

100% acrylic primer for preparing base-coat surface for application of finish coat.

1. Note: Primer to be tinted to closely match Finish Coat including custom colors.

I. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard 100% acrylic-based coating complying

with the following:

1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound

stone particles, and fillers.

2. Refer to EIFS Schedule at end of this Section for finish coat color and texture.

J. Mildew Resistant Finish Additive: EIFS manufacturer's standard mildew resistance additive for

the EIFS system finish coat.

Dryvit: “PMR Finish”.

Comparable products from other specified EIFS manufacturers.

K. Water: Potable.

12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

07240 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

L. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply

with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and

complying with ASTM D 1784.

M. Sealant: Sealant and joint backing materials as specified under Section 07900 – Joint Sealers,

(SLNT7), and complies with requirements for products and testing indicated in ASTM C 1481.

1. Sealant Color: To match EIFS topcoat color.

2.03 MIXING

A. General: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials.

1. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS

manufacturer.

2. Mix materials in clean containers.

3. Use materials within time period specified by EIFS manufacturer or discard.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS.

B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other

construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry.

2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS.

Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish

coats on other work.

B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during

installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and deterioration of

substrates.

C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain

optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.

1. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for insulation

installation. Verify suitability of substrate by performing bond and moisture tests

recommended by EIFS manufacturer.

3.03 EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS

as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.

3.04 SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION

A. Water-Resistive Coatings: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and to

provide water-/weather-resistive barrier.

1. Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside corners of

sheathing unless otherwise indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over sheathing, applied and lapped to shed water; seal at

openings, penetrations, terminations, and where indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written

instructions to protect wall assembly from degradation. Prime substrates, if required, and install

flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions and details.

12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

07240 -5


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.05 TRIM INSTALLATION

A. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, at window sills, and

elsewhere as indicated, according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with

installation of insulation.

1. Weep Screed/Track: Use at bottom termination edges, at window and door heads of waterdrainage

EIFS unless otherwise indicated.

2. Window Sill Flashing: Use at windows unless otherwise indicated.

3. Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings.

4. Casing Bead: Use at other locations.

3.06 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Mesh Backwrap at Edge Conditions: Prior to installing insulation and before applying reinforcing

mesh, fully wrap board edges with detail reinforcing mesh. Cover edges of board and extend

encapsulating mesh not less than 2 inches over front, edge and back face of board as indicated

on Drawings.

1. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows:

a. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat,

reinforcing mesh, and finish coat.

b. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between EIFS

and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh.

B. Board Insulation: Adhesively attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397,

EIFS manufacturer's written application instructions, and the following:

1. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched-trowel method in a manner that results in coating

the entire surface of sheathing with adhesive once insulation is adhered to sheathing.

a. NOTE: Apply the adhesive so that the ribbons run vertically when the insulation board

is placed on the wall.

2. Press and slide insulation into place. Apply pressure over the entire surface of insulation

to accomplish uniform contact, high initial grab, and overall level surface.

3. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for period recommended by EIFS

manufacturer, but not less than 24 hours, before beginning rasping and sanding insulation,

or applying base coat and reinforcing mesh.

4. Apply insulation over dry substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented

horizontally.

5. Begin first course of insulation from a level base line and work upward.

6. Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce running bond

pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches wide or 6 inches

high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches from corners of window and door openings and

not less than 4 inches from aesthetic reveals.

a. Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches from horizontal

and 4 inches from vertical joints in sheathing.

7. Place insulation with adhesive channels aligned in the vertical position for drainage. Align

drainage channels in insulation boards above and below.

8. Interlock ends at internal and external corners.

9. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush,

continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps greater

than 1/16 inch occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using

adhesive or other material.

10. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and

shapes complying with details indicated.

11. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than

1/16 inch from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do

not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch.

12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

07240 -6


Buffalo Wild Wings

12. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit configured

to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with profiles and locations

indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at aesthetic reveals to less than 3/4 inch.

13. Install foam shapes and attach to sheathing or structure.

14. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated.

15. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges and

between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to

produce joint widths indicated on Drawings after encapsulating joint substrates with base

coat and reinforcing mesh.

16. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not

allow water to penetrate behind flashing and EIFS protective-coating.

C. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and as

follows:

1. At expansion joints in substrates behind EIFS.

2. Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including other EIFS.

3. At floor lines in multilevel framed construction.

4. Where wall height or building shape changes.

5. Where EIFS manufacturer requires joints in long continuous elevations.

3.06 BASE COAT INSTALLATION

A. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of concrete, insulation and foam shapes, as applicable,

in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-

inch dry-coat thickness.

B. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free

installation with mesh continuous at corners and overlapped not less than 2 inches or otherwise

treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Do

not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches of corners. Completely embed mesh, applying

additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible.

C. Install reinforcing mesh types where recommended by the manufacturer and as follows:

1. Standard Mesh: Wall areas subject to normal impact and flat walls or walls with moderate

contours.

2. High Impact Mesh: Wall areas as follows:

a. Areas below 8’-0” in height or subject to touch.

b. Areas where projects are located in Wind Debris Zones (120 mph or higher).

c. Where specifically indicated on Drawings.

3. Detail Mesh: Used over special shapes and irregular detail work, at the base of a wall, at

aesthetic and expansion/control joints, around openings and projections.

4. Corner Mesh: For clean, crisp arises, outside corners, prefabricated panel edges and

additional impact resistance.

D. Double-Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat and

second layer of reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2 inches to comply with

ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions in same manner as first application.

1. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.

E. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings extending 4 inches

beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of

openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch- wide strip corner reinforcing mesh at both inside

and outside building corners.

1. At aesthetic reveals, apply strip detail reinforcing mesh not less than 8 inches wide.

2. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh.

F. Foam Shapes: Fully embed detail reinforcing mesh in base coat.

12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

07240 -7


Buffalo Wild Wings

G. Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and

thickness as first application except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat

has cured.

3.07 FINISH COAT INSTALLATION

A. Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Finish Coat: Apply over dry primed base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform

appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color

and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture

variations.

1. Refer to EIFS Schedule at end of this Section for finish coat color and texture.

3.08 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. Sealant and installation of sealant as specified under Section 07900.

1. Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat.

3.09 FINAL INSPECTION/REVIEW

A. General: Conduct inspections, and make repairs or replace unsatisfactory EIFS panels as

required. Completed work exposed to view, to be uniform in texture and color without defects.

B. Additional Requirements: in addition to above, in-place EIFS panels may be rejected for any

one of the following:

1. Exceeding specified installation tolerances.

2. Damaged during construction operations.

3. Exposed-to-view surfaces which develop surface finish deficiencies.

4. Exposed-to-view color and/or texture of surfaces which does not match other surfaces,

adjacent or remote.

5. Exposed-to-view color and texture of surfaces which does not match approved samples

and/or approved mock-up sample.

3.12 EIFS SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Exterior Finishes Schedule Drawing Sheet A100 for EIFS Key Note Locations.

B. Colors and Textures indicated are those of Dryvit Systems, Inc. Provide comparable colors and

textures from other specified manufacturers with approved samples.

(EIFS1): Key Note 18

Color: # 401, “Pretzel”. Finish: Sandpebble.

(EIFS2): Key Note 19:

Color: Color to Match Sherwin Williams Color # SW6898, “Social Butterfly”, (C13).

Finish: Sandpebble.

Note: The following two colors are used together in an alternating 2’-0” pattern in locations as

indicated on Drawings.

(EIFS3): Key Note 20:

Color: # 714, “Licorice”. Finish: Sandpebble.

(EIFS4): Key Note 21:

Color: # 310, “China White”. Finish: Sandpebble.

12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

07240 -8


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.13 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials

from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS

coatings.

END OF SECTION

12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

07240 -9


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 07260 - AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Air Barriers: Materials to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints between exterior

walls and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: for vapor retarder under slab.

B. Section 07212 - Board and Batt Insulation.

C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and installation techniques.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

B. ASTM E 1677 - Specification for an Air Retarder (AR) Material or System for Low-Rise Framed

Building Walls.

C. AATCC – American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists.

1. Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Vapor Permeability (Perm): Measure in accordance with ASTM E 96 Procedure E.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before,

during and after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Air Barrier: Spunbonded olefin, nonwoven, non-perforated:

1. Tyvek(R) Water Resistant Barrier, Manufactured by DuPont Company, Wilmington, DE.

a. Classification: ASTM E 1677, Type I; air leakage at 25 mph wind pressure less than

0.06 cubic feet per minute per square foot.

b. Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms ASTM E 96, Method B.

c. Water Penetration Resistance: Minimum 78.7 inches per AATCC Test Method 127.

2. Sealing Tape: DuPont Tyvek Tape.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.

3.02 AIR BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install air barrier materials and assemblies in conjunction with materials described in other

sections to provide continuous sealed barrier in the exterior enclosure of the building.

04-27-11 AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS

07260 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

C. Over exterior surface of sheathing, behind facing brick, install sheet with fasteners as

recommended by sheet manufacturer.

1. Note: Do not install air barrier over sheathing in areas that receive EIFS. In EIFS areas, a

liquid water resistive barrier will be installed over sheathing as part of EIFS system. Refer

to Section 07240.

D. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.

E. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS

07260 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 07411 - PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Standing Seam Metal Roofing and Wall System.

B. Accessories and miscellaneous components.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Roof framing and purlins.

B. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing.

C. Section 07212 – Board and Batt Insulation: Board insulation under roof system.

D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Field-installed sealants.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Standing Seam Roof System: Standing seam metal roof system applied over # 30 roof felt over

1” polyisocyanurate board insulation on 5/8” roof sheathing on metal roof deck.

B. Standing Seam Canopy End Panel System: Standing seam metal roof system applied vertically

over # 30 roof felt on 5/8” plywood sheathing for canopy end panels.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. AAMA 621: Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated

Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates.

B. ASTM D 226: Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and

Waterproofing.

C. ASTM A 653/A 653M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

D. UL 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.

1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Performance Requirements: Provide complete engineered system complying with specified

requirements and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding anticipated movement

of substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system.

B. Wind Uplift: System to comply with requirements for UL Classification 580 for UL classified 90

rated assemblies.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions,

spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayment, and special conditions.

1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled.

C. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been

completed in Owner's name and are registered with manufacturer.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of roofing systems

similar to those required for this project, with not less than 5 years of documented experience.

04-27-11 PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS

07411 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to

panels prior to installation.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of

sheathing, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a watertight, secure, and

noncorrosive installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s special warranty covering failure of factory-applied

exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence

of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified

warranty period of 20 year period from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s warranty for weathertightness of roofing

system, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water within

specified warranty period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

1. Architectural Building Components: www.archmetalroof.com. Permaseam Roofing

System.

2. Petersen Aluminum Corporation: www.pac-clad.com. Snap Clad Roofing Panels.

2.02 METAL PANELS

A. Panel Material: G-90 galvanized steel sheet in compliance with ASTM A653.

1. Gauge: 24 gauge.

2. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum 1-3/4” inch seam height; concealed fastener system

for field snap lock type installation.

3. Texture: Smooth, not embossed.

4. Length: Maximum possible length to minimize lapped joints.

5. Width: 12 inch wide panels.

6. Finish: 70% polyvinylidene flouride resin type “Kynar 500” or equivalent, AAMA 621.

a. Color: Matte Black.

2.03 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM

A. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard concealed anchor clips designed for

specific roofing system and engineered to meet performance requirements, including

anticipated thermal movement.

1. Note: Roof system manufacturer to provide extended panel clips or bearing plates to

accommodate the 1” thick roof insulation and to allow direct fastening of system to plywood

substrate.

2.04 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, trim, moldings, closure strips, and other

exposed components of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the roofing panels.

Items completely concealed after installation may optionally be made of stainless or galvanized

steel.

B. Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel, furnished by metal panel manufacturer for

specific substrate.

04-27-11 PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS

07411 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

C. Roofing Felt: Type 30, asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, conforming to ASTM D226.

D. Roof Insulation: 1” thick, polyisocyanurate insulation board as specified under Section 07212 for

mechanical installation to plywood substrate.

E. Sealants: As specified under Section 07900.

1. Exposed sealant must cure to rubber-like consistency.

2. Concealed sealant must be non-hardening type.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Panels: Fabricate panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer’s standard

processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of

the Work.

1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or

blocking, that tops of fasteners are flush with surface, and that installation is within flatness

tolerances required for finished roofing installation.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely

anchored, and that provision has been made for drainage, flashings, and penetrations

through sheet metal roofing.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other

adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks.

B. Remove protective film from surface of roof panels immediately prior to installation. Strip film

carefully, to avoid damage to prefinished surfaces.

C. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt

sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer.

D. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal

joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel

manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions.

Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal and

structural movement.

B. Standing Seam Roof System:

1. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

application indicated.

2. Install roofing system clips and bearing plates to plywood substrate with approved

fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to allow for thickness of

insulations board.

3. Mechanically fasten insulation board to plywood substrate with anchors and washers as

recommended by insulation manufacturer with edges butted tightly in both directions.

Anchor clips should protrude through insulation joints for anchoring of roof panels.

04-27-11 PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS

07411 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

4. Roofing Felt: Install felt underlayment over insulation board under sheet metal roofing.

Use adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under

sheet metal roofing. Apply over entire roof surface, in shingle fashion to shed water, with

lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

5. Install roof flashing, trim and moldings securely to substrate. Seal joints and laps in

components for water tight seal. Install metal flashing to lap over sheet metal roofing to

allow moisture to run over and off the material.

6. Install roof panels securely in place in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

C. Standing Seam Canopy End Panel System:

1. Install roofing system clips and bearing plates to plywood substrate with approved

fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Roofing Felt: Install felt underlayment over plywood substrate under sheet metal roofing.

Use adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under

sheet metal roofing. Apply over entire vertical surface, in shingle fashion to shed water,

with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

3. Install roof flashing, trim and moldings securely to substrate. Seal joints and laps in

components for water tight seal. Install metal flashing to lap over sheet metal roofing to

allow moisture to run over and off the material.

4. Install roof panels securely in place in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films,

excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and

unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish.

B. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary

walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing until

completion of project.

C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before date of Substantial

Completion.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS

07411 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 07424 - ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM

A. Aluminum composite panels including related flashing and accessory components.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry: Canopy framing and sheathing.

B. Section 07260 – Air Barriers.

C. Section 07620 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

D. Section 07900 – Joint Sealers.

D. Section 08310 – Access Doors and Panels: for access panel in entry soffit.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. System: Preformed and prefinished aluminum composite panel system with sub-girt

framing/anchorage, clip angles fasteners and other accessories for secure anchorage to

structural subframe installed using a rout and return wet joint system.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM B 209: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

2. ASTM C 920: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

3. ASTM D 2244: Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally

Measured Color Coordinates.

4. ASTM D 4214: Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films.

B. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA):

1. AAMA 620: Voluntary Specification High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated

Architectural Aluminum.

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA).

1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Minimum 5 years of continuous experience manufacturing composite panels of

the type specified, and capable of providing a list of 5 projects of comparable size.

B. Fabricator/Installer: Certified by panel manufacturer, minimum 5 years of continuous experience

fabricating and installing composite panels of the type specified.

C. Take field measurements prior to completion of shop fabricate and finishing.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of

composite panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate fabrication and installation layouts of composite panels; details of edge

conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings,

closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish among factory, shop, and fieldassembled

work.

C. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.

04-27-11 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM

07424 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store and handle panels according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Deliver, composite panels, and other manufactured components so as not to be damaged or

deformed. Package composite panels for protection during transportation and handling.

C. Unload, store, and erect composite panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting,

and surface damage.

D. Store metal-faced composite panels vertically, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated

covering. Store composite panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water.

Do not store composite panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting,

or other surface damage. Do not allow storage space to exceed 120 deg F.

E. Retain strippable protective covering on composite panel for period of panel installation.

F. Protect installed panels from damage. Replace any panels damaged during storage and

construction.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit assembly of composite panels to be performed according to manufacturer's

written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by

field measurements before composite panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop

Drawings.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate composite panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction

of studs, soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a watertight, secure, and noncorrosive

installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of composite panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.

b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace composite panels that show evidence of deterioration of

factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.

04-27-11 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM

07424 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

1. Alcoa Architectural Products: Reynobond ACM. www.alcoaarchitecturalproducts.com

2. Firestone Metal Products: Una-clad Series 1000UC Aluminum Composite Panel System.

www.unaclad.com

3. Mitsubishi Plastics Composites, Inc.: Alpolic Composite Metal Panels.

www.alpolic-usa.com

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with

temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.

2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes:

a. Metallic Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. 3-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended

metallic flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color

coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pre-treat, and apply coating to exposed metal

surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

3. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored

acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum

total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

B. Panel Sealants:

1. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use

classifications required to seal joints in composite panels and remain weathertight; and as

recommended in writing by panel manufacturer.

a. Sealant Color: Color to match panel color.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING

A. Panel System Subgrits: Provide galvanized steel of gauge and spacing required for panel

system structural requirements, as recommended by panel manufacture and in accordance with

approved shop drawings. To avoid galvanic reaction, separate dissimilar metals.

B. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,

holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to

substrates.

2.04 COMPOSITE PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed and assembled, aluminum faced composite panels fabricated

from two metal facings bonded, using no glues or adhesives, to solid, extruded thermoplastic

core; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include attachment system

components and accessories required for weathertight system.

B. Aluminum Composite Panels: Formed with 0.020-inch thick, coil-coated aluminum sheet

facings.

1. Panel Thickness: 4 mm.

2. Core: Standard.

3. Exterior Finish: 3-coat Metallic fluoropolymer.

4. Color: Una-Clad “Silver Metallic”.

a. Comparable color from the other specified composite panel manufacturer’s with color

samples approved by Architect.

04-27-11 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM

07424 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete composite panel

assembly including trim, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar

items. Match material and finish of composite panels for exposed items.

B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and

other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.

C. Flashing: Aluminum, same finish as for aluminum panel where exposed; secured with

concealed fastening method.

2.06 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish composite panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent

possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles

and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Metal-Faced Composite Panels: Factory form panels in a continuous process with no glues or

adhesives between dissimilar materials. Trim and square edges of sheets with no displacement

of face sheets or protrusion of core material.

1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp

and buckle.

2. Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges, with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion

of core material.

3. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners, as required to comply with deflection limits, attached

to back of panels with structural silicone sealant or bond tape.

4. Dimensional Tolerances:

a. Panel Bow: 0.8 percent maximum of panel length or width.

b. Squareness: 0.25 inch (5 mm) maximum.

C. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and

other characteristics of item indicated.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,

and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded

back to form hems.

D. System Type: Rout and Return Wet Joint System.

PART - 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances of composite panel supports, and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking

and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by composite panel

manufacturer.

2. Verify that air barrier has been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air

infiltration or water penetration.

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating composite panels to verify actual

locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of panels before panel installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

04-27-11 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM

07424 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support

members and anchorage according to composite panel manufacturer's written instructions and

approved Shop Drawings.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Attachment System Installation: Install attachment system required to support metal-faced

composite panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including perimeter

extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels.

1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery,

and panel-system joint seals.

B. Install composite panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes,

and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to subgirts unless otherwise

indicated. Anchor panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions

for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving composite panels.

2. Flash and seal composite panels at perimeter of all openings. Do not begin installation until

air barrier and flashings that will be concealed by panels are installed.

3. Install flashing and trim as composite panel work proceeds.

4. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating panels.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,

protect against galvanic action as recommended by composite panel manufacturer.

D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for

weathertight performance of composite panel assemblies.

1. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07900 Joint

Sealers.

E. Coordinate installation of composite panel system with installation of entry canopy access

panel. Refer to Section 08310.

3.04 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and

provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete composite panel assembly including trim,

flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation

instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners

where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,

and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form

hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and

weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space

movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner

or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be

sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked

flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

04-27-11 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM

07424 -5


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align composite panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4

inch in 20 feet, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within

1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as composite panels are

installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On

completion of installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer.

Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. After composite panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt,

and sealant.

C. Replace composite panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful

repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM

07424 -6


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 07535 - MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. Mechanically-attached single-ply roofing, insulation and accessories, installed in accordance

with drawings and specifications approved by the roofing membrane manufacturer.

B. Indicated on the drawings as: Membrane Roofing System.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05310 - Steel Deck.

B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.

C. Section 07212 – Board and Batt Insulation for roof insulation board.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D 471 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Effect of Liquids.

B. ASTM D 751 - Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics.

C. ASTM D 1149 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration--Surface Ozone Cracking in a

Chamber.

D. ASTM D 1204 - Standard Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of Nonrigid

Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at Elevated Temperature.

E. ASTM D-2136 - Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics - Low-Temperature Bend Test.

F. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation.

G. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Certification: Manufacturer's written approval of this specification and of any proposed

deviations from the specification or drawings or previously approved details. The

manufacturer's approval does not constitute a waiver of the requirements of this specification or

the drawings or approval of deviations not specifically itemized.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Roofing contractor certified by manufacturer.

1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials with packaging labels indicating appropriate warnings, storage conditions, lot

numbers, and usage instructions.

B. Store materials in their original undamaged packaging; maintain storage conditions in

accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01700 - Execution Requirements, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide manufacturer's standard "Total System" material and labor, 10-year warranty.

04-27-11 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING

07535 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. 525 Morley Drive, Saginaw, MI 48601, 800-

248-0280. www.duro-last.com

2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM

A. Duro-Last 5-Foot Tab, Mechanically-Attached.

1. Classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a Class A roofing material for use in

construction of Class A roofing assemblies.

2. Meet test requirements for FM Class 1A fire and I-60 wind resistance.

B. Membrane: Scrim-reinforced, thermoplastic based sheet, bearing UL label on the packaging.

1. Thickness: 0.40 inch, nominal, when measured in accordance with ASTM D 751.

2. Sheet Length: As required to avoid end seams.

3. Color: White.

4. Breaking Strength: 350 lbf, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 751, Grab Method.

5. Tear strength (ASTM D 751, Procedure B), 8 x 8 inch sample: 100 lbf.

6. Brittleness test (ASTM D 2136, at minus 40 deg C): Pass.

7. Dimensional stability, percent change max. (ASTM D 1204 B: 1 hr at 212 deg F, W: 6 hrs

at 176 deg F): Plus/minus 0.1 percent.

8. Water absorption (ASTM D 471) 158 degrees F for 7 days: Plus 1.0 percent maximum

weight change

9. Ozone resistance of reinforced membrane: No cracking when tested in accordance with

ASTM D 1149, for 70 hr at 100 degrees F.

2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Flashing: Same membrane as specified above.

B. Bonding Adhesive:

1. Contact cement to adhere membrane and flashings to various substrates e.g., insulation

surfaces, masonry surfaces, plywood, concrete, or metal.

2. It is not acceptable to use bonding adhesive in the seams.

C. Perimeter Sheets: As specified in Part 3.

D. Sealant: Use for water cut-off mastic, pitch-box sealer, and to seal membrane to metal.

E. Cut-Edge Sealant: Use to seal exposed cut edges of reinforced membrane.

F. Seam Cleaner: Use to remove contaminants from the surface of the membrane where hot-air

welding is to occur.

G. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board that is accepted and warranted in writing by membrane

manufacturer for use in a mechanically attached system. Refer to Section 07212 for

requirements.

1. R-Value: 30.

H. Mechanical Fasteners: Type and spacing as required by roofing manufacturer; supplied by

roofing manufacturer.

I. Two-Way Air Vents: Manufacturer's standard vents.

J. For vent stacks, pipes, drains, and corners: Prefabricated pipe boots and inside and outside

corners provided by manufacturer.

04-27-11 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING

07535 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

K. Roof Walkway Pads: Duro-Last Roof Trak II Walkway Pad. Heat weld to membrane in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Color: Gray.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Do not deviate from this specification without written approval of the manufacturer. Should

deviations or changes occur without the manufacturer's approval, the project will not be eligible

for warranty coverage.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces to be bonded to are dry, clean and free of debris. Suitable surfaces are

smooth, solid masonry, wood, and metal, plus insulation board fastened to the specific

manufacturer's recommendations for receiving mechanically fastened roofing membranes and

accepted by roofing system manufacturer for mechanically fastened application.

B. Verify that positive roof slope exists in all areas.

C. Verify that rooftop mechanical units are to have their condensation lines piped to drains or off

the roof.

D. Verify that rooftop grease units will have approved grease containment systems or a regularly

scheduled maintenance program.

E. Correct unsuitable conditions before proceeding with installation. Commencing installation

signifies acceptance by the installer of the substrate.

3.03 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

A. Prior to the start of work, make the substrate smooth and free of debris, sharp edges, and other

surface irregularities that will be detrimental to the installation.

B. Correct unevenness and joint gaps greater than 1/4 inch in the membrane substrate as they can

cause inconsistent membrane welds. When such conditions occur fill with appropriate and

properly secured insulation or material approved by manufacturer's technical review

department.

C. Flashing Substrates: Verify that the substrate is smooth and free of sharp edges and other

surface irregularities that will be detrimental to 100-percent adhesion of the flashing membrane.

3.04 FASTENERS - GENERAL

A. Install fasteners with a depth-sensing screw gun to prevent overdriving or underdriving, unless

otherwise approved or required by project conditions.

3.05 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Handle and secure insulation boards so as to not damage or rupture the facer and surface. Cut

out damaged areas and replace with structurally sound insulation, properly secured in place.

B. Install boards with the longest dimension perpendicular to the direction of the membrane seams

and with end joints staggered. Butt boards as closely as possible with no gaps over 1/4 inch.

C. Mechanically attach boards:

1. Use fastener pattern and spacing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Provide additional fasteners as necessary to conform to the substrate surface geometry.

D. Tapered Insulation: Install tapered boards under a layer of flat insulation boards; maintain

smooth transition at changes of slope.

1. Provide tapered insulation boards and thicknesses to create tapered areas as indicated on

Roof Plan.

04-27-11 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING

07535 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

E. Insulation must have and approved nonstyrene facer or provide a slip sheet between insulation

and membrane.

3.06 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Membrane Attachment: Space fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's standard and

approved submittals.

B. Perimeter Sheets: Install perimeter sheets and full-sheet in accordance with fastener pattern

specified by manufacturer. Install fasteners along the edge of the membrane through the

insulation, and into the roof deck.

C. Field Sheets:

1. Unroll membrane on the area to be covered.

2. Install fasteners along the leading edge of the membrane, as illustrated in membrane

manufacturer's details, through the insulation, and into the roof deck.

3. Lap adjoining rolls of membrane over the fastened edge of the installed membrane by 6

inches in accordance with standard details for fastener location and specific deck type

penetration requirements.

3.07 FASTENING PATTERNS

A. Meet the requirements of the membrane manufacturer for fastener type, spacing and pattern.

3.08 SEALING OF MEMBRANE

A. Lap Splices: Overlap and hot-air weld membrane without any contaminants (adhesive, dirt,

debris, etc.) in the seam.

1. Automatic hot-air welder and hand-held welder.

2. Use hand-held welders for small work and repairs.

3. Use automatic hot-air welders for field seaming.

4. Caulk cut edges by applying Cut-Edge Sealant from a squeeze bottle.

B. Welding of Membrane After Exposure:

1. Remove visible dirt and debris with a clean cloth and water. If necessary, use a detergent

cleaner (e.g. Fantastik or 409) followed by a water rinse.

2. With a clean scrub pad saturated with manufacturer recommended seam cleaner,

aggressively agitate the seaming area.

3. Follow the standard hot-air welding procedure with an approximate 20 percent reduction in

speed.

4. Final weld strength may not be achieved for several days.

3.09 FLASHINGS, EXPANSION JOINTS, DRAINS, AND WALKWAYS

A. Flashing: Flash perimeters as shown in manufacturer standard detail drawings. Do not cover

weep holes or any form of through-wall drainage.

1. Mechanically fasten all flashing at the top, under or through counter flashing, with approved

fasteners and with an approved HT termination detail as shown in detail drawings.

2. Install pipe flashings in accordance with membrane manufacturer's details. Do not flash to

lead.

B. Two-Way Air Vents: Install two-way air vents at a rate of one for every 1,000 square feet of

deck. Install vents centered between rows of fastening tabs.

C. Roof Drains: Install in accordance with membrane manufacturer's details.

1. Properly secure all bolts to provide 100-percent continuous compression of the clamping

ring.

2. Do not run field seams through drains.

3. Clean or replace existing drains as required to achieve manufacturer's recommended

clamping detail; remove old lead and packings.

04-27-11 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING

07535 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

D. Roof Walkway Pads: Install pads in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions.

1. Prepare dirty or weathered membrane:

a. Remove any visible dirt and debris with a clean rag and water.

b. For heavily contaminated surface, scrubbing with a detergent cleaner (i.e. Fantastik or

409) followed by a water rinse may be necessary.

2. Install roof walkway pads forming a direct path, in lines parallel to the building faces, from

the roof access hatch to each piece of rooftop mechanical equipment.

3. Position walkway pad and cut to desired length.

4. Whenever possible, do not cover membrane seams with walkway pad. When installed

adjacent to a seam, keep the pad a minimum of 2 inches from the edge of the seam on the

bottom sheet of the completed lap and a minimum of 6 inches from the edge of the seam

when located on the top sheet of a completed lap.

5. When covering seams is unavoidable, the lap seam should be completed in accordance

with manufacturer's specifications and thoroughly probed with any deficiencies repaired

prior to pad installation.

6. In circumstances where drainage around the walkway pad is a concern, shorter walkway

pad lengths spaced with a 2 inch gap may be desired.

7. Weld perimeter of walkway pad to the membrane following standard welding procedures.

Periodic breaks in the weld of 1 to 2 inches are required on the low slope edge of the pad

to prevent the accumulation of water under the pad.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Ensure that metal work shall be secured in a manner approved by roofing manufacturer, or in

accordance with SMACNA guidelines, to prevent damage from buckling, or wind exposure. All

metal work that is part of the waterproofing envelope shall be sealed, structurally sound, and

appropriately anchored to prevent leakage.

B. Tests:

1. Seam Tests: Probe the entire lap edge of each seam with an approved seam probing tool

(Sears cotter-pin extractor) after seam has cooled completely to verify seam consistency.

Probing before the seam area has cooled will damage the membrane.

2. Destructive Seam Tests: Test 3 inch wide area of seam weld to verify good peel strength.

A properly welded seam will have membrane delamination from scrim prior to weld failure.

Perform the following destructive tests on welds:

a. First seam of each working day.

b. First seam after the automatic hot-air welder has been allowed to cool down.

c. After any extreme changes in weather conditions.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Upon completion of the installation, the manufacturer's

representative shall make an inspection to ascertain that the roofing membrane system has

been installed according to manufacturer's approved specifications and details.

D. Warranty Inspection: Provide manufacturer's inspection for acceptance for warranty.

E. Rejection of Defective Work: Areas having excessive patching as a result of damage to the

membrane or faulty installation may be rejected by membrane manufacturer or the Architect;

replace the membrane completely in these areas.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING

07535 -5


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including scuppers, flashings, counterflashings, reglets, gutters,

downspouts, and coping caps.

B. Miscellaneous flashing work not specified as work of other sections.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Thru-wall masonry flashing.

B. Section 07535 - Mechanically Attached Membrane Roofing: Roofing system.

C. Section 07720 - Roof Accessories: Roof Hatch.

D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

E. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

C. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.

D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning

Contractors' National Association.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and

standard details, except as otherwise indicated.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope

metal sheets to ensure drainage.

B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.

C. Protect pre-finished surfaces from damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

A. (SHT MET1) Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc

coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating.

1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA

2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.

2. Color: Color to match Una-Clad “Silver Metallic”.

B. (SHT MET2) Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum

0.02 inch thick base metal.

04-27-11 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07620 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.

B. Primer: Zinc chromate type.

C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc alkyd.

D. Sealant: (SLNT6) specified in Section 07900.

E. Bituminous Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. Verify compatibility with roofing membrane

2.03 REGLETS

A. Reglets: Recessed and surface mounted types for concrete and unit masonry applications; 26

gauge galvanized steel.

1. Recessed Reglet: Type MA reglet with Springlok Flashing.

2. Surface Mounted Reglet: Type SM reglet with Springlok Flashing and 7/8” diameter,

stainless steel washers with neoprene facing.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product:

1. Fry Reglet Corporation: Springlok Reglets and Flashing System.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.

B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.

C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.

D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use

sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.

E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with

sealant.

F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form

drip.

G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges.

2.05 SCUPPER FABRICATION

A. Scuppers: Fabricate to dimensions and configurations shown on the Drawings.

B. Seal metal joints.

2.06 MULTI-PIPE ROOF PENETRATIONS

A. Fabricate hooded sheet metal enclosure at multiple roof penetrations. Do not use pitch pockets.

1. Fabricate enclosure of proper size to accommodate pipes, insulation and necessary work

clearances.

2. Pipe penetrations shall be through the side of the exterior of the enclosure and shall occur

a minimum of 8 inches above the roof membrane.

3. Provide sloping sheet metal top on enclosure with hemmed drip edges on all sides and

extended overhang a minimum of 6 inches on the side where pipe penetrations occur.

4. Coordinate with Section 06100 for required curbing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets

in place, and nailing strips located.

04-27-11 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07620 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.

B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film

thickness of 15 mil.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where

permitted.

B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.

C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines

accurate to profiles.

D. Seal metal joints watertight.

3.04 SCHEDULE

A. Scuppers and Downspouts: 20 gauge.

B. Coping, Cap, Parapet, Sill and Ledge Flashings: 24 gauge.

C. Counterflashing at Roofing Terminations (over roofing base flashings): 24 gauge.

D. Counterflashing at Curb-Mounted Roof Items: 24 gauge.

E. Hook strips and keepers: 22 gauge.

F. Other sheet metal work: 24 gauge.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07620 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

A. Roof hatches, ladder post and safety railing.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05310 - Steel Deck.

B. Section 07535 – Mechanically Attached Membrane Roofing.

C. Section 09900 – Painting and Coatings.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ROOF HATCHES

A. Manufacturers - Roof Hatches: Bilco Co.: www.bilco.com

1. Product: Bilco Type S Roof Hatch.

B. Roof Hatch: Factory-assembled steel frame and cover, complete with operating and release

hardware.

1. Style: Provide flat metal covers unless otherwise indicated.

2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting conditions indicated on the

drawings.

3. Size(s):

a. For Ladder Access: Single leaf; 2’-6” x 3’-0”.

C. Frames/Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings;

extended bottom flange to suit mounting.

1. Material: Galvanized steel, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick.

2. Finish: Factory prime paint.

3. Insulation: 1 inch rigid fiber board, located on outside face of curb.

4. Curb Height: 12 inches from finished surface of roof, minimum.

D. Metal Covers: Flush, insulated, hollow metal construction.

1. Capable of supporting 40 psf live load.

2. Material: G-90, galvanized steel; outer cover 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick, liner 22 gage,

0.03 inch thick.

3. Finish: Factory prime paint.

4. Insulation: Concealed 1 inch rigid glass fiber.

5. Gasket: Neoprene, continuous around cover perimeter.

E. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by

manufacturer.

1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that

automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf load.

2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type.

3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release.

4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release.

5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior.

6. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior.

04-27-11 ROOF ACCESSORIES

07720 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

F. Telescoping Safety Post:

1. Bilco, LadderUp telescoping safety post. Bilco Model LU-1, steel with black powder coat

finish.

G. Safety Railing: Bilco Model Bil-Guard Hatch Railing System., OSHA approved, mounted on

side and front of hatch curb.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather

integrity.

B. Finished installation shall meet approval of roofing installer.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 ROOF ACCESSORIES

07720 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Sealants and joint backing.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 07260 - Air Barriers.

B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

C. Section 07535 - Mechanically Attached Membrane Roofing: Sealants required in conjunction

with roofing.

D. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.

B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

C. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

D. ASTM C 1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid

Applied Sealants.

E. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; www.aqmd.gov.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum three years experience.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after

installation.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01700 - Execution Requirements, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight

seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

04-27-11 JOINT SEALERS

07900 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Silicone Sealants:

1. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com

2. Dow Corning Corp: www.dowcorning.com

3. GE Plastics: www.geplastics.com

4. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com

5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Polyurethane Sealants:

1. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com

2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com

3. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc: www.chemrex.com

4. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com

5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

C. Butyl Sealants:

1. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com

2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com

3. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com

4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

D. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants:

1. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com

2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com

3. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc: www.chemrex.com

4. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com

5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 SEALANTS

A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound

(VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management

District Rule No.1168.

B. (SLNT1) General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25,

Uses M, G, and A; single component.

1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.

2. Applications: Use for:

a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.

b. Joints between concrete and other materials.

c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.

d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.

C. (SLNT2) General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP,

Grade NF single component, paintable.

1. Applications: Use for:

a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.

b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.

c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.

04-27-11 JOINT SEALERS

07900 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

D. (SLNT3) Sanitary/Tile Sealant: ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; single component silicone,

mildew resistant.

1. Color: White, Black and Clear.

2. Applications: Use for:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces, White.

b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces, Clear.

c. Control joints in tile installations in toilet rooms and kitchen, Black.

E. (SLNT4) Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Class 25,

Uses T, I, M and A; single component.

1. Applications: Use for:

a. Joints in concrete sidewalks and vehicular paving.

F. (SLNT5) Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, G, O; single

component, solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging.

1. Applications: Use for:

a. Seam sealant for masonry flashing.

b. Bedding sealant for thresholds and sills.

G. (SLNT6) Low Modulus Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G,

M, O; single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, nonbleeding.

1. Color: Clear.

2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent.

3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F.

4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35.

5. Applications: Use for:

a. Air barrier perimeter.

b. Exterior sheet metal joints.

H. (SLNT7) Ultra-Low Modulus Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,

Class 100/50, for Use NT, Silicone rubber based, 1 part neutral cure elastomeric sealant.

1. Color: To match EIFS.

2. Movement Capability: Plus 100 percent to minus 50 percent movement.

3. Accepable Manufacturers and Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation: 790 Building Sealant.

b. General Electric Company: GE SilPruf

c. Tremco Construction Division: Spectrem 1.

4. Applications: Use for:

a. Perimeter and internal joints in EIFS System.

2.03 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint

substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated

by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Sealant Backer Rod: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of

size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant

performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint

surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

04-27-11 JOINT SEALERS

07900 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;

compatible with joint forming materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193.

D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of

surfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.

C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck

dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific

dimensions are indicated.

D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when

sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

G. Tool joints concave.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect sealants until cured.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 JOINT SEALERS

07900 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 08110 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Non-fire rated steel doors and frames.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors.

B. Section 08380 - Traffic Doors.

C. Section 08710 - Door Hardware.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A250.6 - Hardware on Standard Steel Doors (Reinforcement--Application).

B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

C. ANSI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.

D. ASTM A 366/A 366M - Standard Specification for Commercial Steel (CS) Sheet, Carbon, (0.15

Maximum Percent) Cold-Rolled.

E. ASTM A 569/A 569M - Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot-

Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial.

F. ASTM A 591/A 591M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light

Coating Weight (Mass) Applications.

G. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

H. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

I. ASTM A 1011/A 1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

J. ASTM C 1036-01: Specification for Flat Glass.

K. DHI A115.1G - Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute.

L. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association.

M. SDI 105 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel frames; Steel Door Institute.

N. SDI 113 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Apparent Thermal Performance of Steel

Door and Frame Assemblies; Steel Door Institute.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Door and Frame Schedule: Prepared by the Door and Frame Supplier, indicating a listing of

each hollow metal door and frame component for each door opening. Schedule includes frame

size, throat dimension, door size and type.

1. Organization: Door and Frame Schedule to be organized to follow the same numbering

order as Door Schedule on Drawings.

2. Door and Frame Schedule to be coordinated with Hardware Schedule for Hollow Metal

Doors and Frames.

04-27-11 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08110 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide all products from a single manufacturer who is a member

of the Steel Door Institute.

B. Manufacture products only after receipt of approved hardware schedule and templates.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Upon delivery, inspect all materials for damage; notify shipper and supplier if damage is found.

B. Protect products from moisture, construction traffic, and damage.

C. Store vertically under cover. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters. Should

wrappers become wet, remove immediately.

D. Place units on 4 inch high wood sills or in a manner that will prevent rust or damage. Provide

1/4 inch space between doors to promote air circulation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DOOR AND FRAME SUPPLIER

A. Hollow metal doors and frames are to be furnished by the General Contactor through Twin City

Hardware as part of the current BWW Door and Hardware Package.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

Twin City Hardware Company

723 Hadley Avenue North

Oakdale, MN 55128

651-735-2200

A. Ingersoll Rand, Steelcraft.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet for Doors and Frames:

1. Cold rolled steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS.

2. Hot rolled steel: Pickled and oiled, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Designation CS Type B.

3. Galvanized steel: Hot-dipped, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60/Z180 coating, minimum.

B. Steel Sheet for Anchors and Accessories: Electrolytically deposited zinc coated steel; ASTM A

591/A 591M, coating 40Z (12G), minimum.

C. Accessory Materials:

1. Rubber Door Silencers: Furnish three at each single leaf door frames and two at each pairs

of doors.

D. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08800 Glazing.

2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.8.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricate frames from metallic-coated steel sheet assembled with a

mechanical interlock joint, face miter seam “closed and tight”. Weld face seam and full web of

frame (T-3). Grind and dress smooth weld area. Apply zinc rich primer over grinding area.

1. Sheet Thickness: 14 gauge.

2. Material and Finish: Zinc-alloy-iron coating (galvannealed) to a minimum coating weight of

A60 to comply with ASTM A 653.

3. Galvanize internal members and reinforcements.

04-27-11 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08110 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

C. Interior Frames: Fabricate from cold rolled steel sheet assembled with a mechanical interlock

joint, face miter seam “closed and tight”. Weld face seam of frame (T-2). Grind and dress

smooth weld area. Apply zinc rich primer over grinding area.

1. Sheet Thickness: 16 gauge.

D. Traffic Doors Frames: Fabricate from cold rolled steel sheet assembled with a mechanical

interlock joint, face miter seam “closed and tight”. Weld face seam of frame (T-2). Grind and

dress smooth weld area. Apply zinc rich primer over grinding area.

1. Sheet Thickness: 14 gauge.

2. Configuration: Fabricate without stop and with added reinforcement for traffic door

hardware.

E. Frame Finish: Shop prime for field painting under Section 09900.

F. Finished work to be smooth and free from warps and buckles.

G. Silencers: Glynn-Johnson, 64 Silencer. Furnish 3 at single door strike jambs, 2 at head of pair

doors.

H. Provide floor clips for frames. Provide jamb anchors spaced not over 30" on center for frames.

Furnish temporary spreader bars and bracing.

2.05 HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. Exterior Flush Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level III, Model 2,Extra Heavy

Duty, seamless design, Full Flush Door.

1. Face Sheet Thickness: 16 gauge.

2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inch.

3. Core: Polystyrene.

Note: Provide Polystyrene core for exterior doors and Mechanical Room door, (Type 6).

5. Fabricate with watertight top closure and construct to receive weatherstripping as specified

under Section 08700.

6. Material and Finish: Zinc-alloy-iron coating (galvannealed) to a minimum coating weight of

A60 to comply with ASTM A 653. Shop prime for field painting under Section 09900.

B. Interior Flush Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level II, Model 2, Heavy Duty,

seamless design, Full Flush Doors.

1. Face Sheet: 16 gauge.

2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inch.

3. Core: Impregnated kraft honeycomb core.

4. Material and Finish: Cold rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008. Shop prime for

field painting under Section 09900.

5. Glazing Stops: Construct removable glazing stops of 16 gauge steel. Factory fit and install

stops. Form neat hairline joints. Install stops using screws not over 16" on center with at

least two screws per piece.

2.06 LOUVERS

A. Metal Louvers: Provide manufacturers standard 12” high by 18” wide metal louver in Office

door, in location as indicated on Drawings.

1. Shop prime louver for field painting under Section 09900.

2.07 GLAZING

A (GL5): One-Way Mirror Glass 1/4 inch thick; ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 2, q3 quality, Style B,

clear tempered glass with a reflective coating one side.

1. Provide glass for Office door in location as indicated on Drawings.

04-27-11 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08110 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that project conditions are suitable before beginning installation of frames.

B. Correct unsatisfactory condition before preceding with installation.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install frames plumb, level, rigid, and in true alignment as recommended in ANSI A250.11 and

DHI A115.1G.

B. Install doors plumb and in true alignment and fasten to achieve the maximum operational

effectiveness and appearance of the unit. Maintain clearances specified in ANSI A250.8 and

NFPA 80 whichever is more restrictive.

C. Fill welded wrap-around frames in masonry construction with grout as masonry is laid-up.

Brace or fasten frame in such a way to prevent pressure of the grout from deforming frame.

1. Mix grout to provide 4 inch maximum consistency and hand trowel into place.

2. Do not use grout mixed to thin "pumpable" consistency.

D. If additives are used in masonry or plaster work during cold weather, field coat the inside of

steel frames with a bituminous compound to prevent corrosion.

E. Install doors plumb and in true alignment and fasten to achieve the maximum operational

effectiveness and appearance of the unit. Maintain clearances specified. Shim as indicated in

DHI A115.1G and SDI 122.

F. Install hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's recommendations and templates.

Consult DHI A115.1G and ANSI A250.6 as necessary.

G. Install door silencers shortly before substantial completion.

3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Adjust doors for proper operation, free from binding or other defects.

B. Clean and restore soiled surfaces. Remove scraps and debris, and leave site and a clean

condition.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08110 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Flush wood doors; non-rated.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry.

B. Section 08110 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

C. Section 08710 - Door Hardware.

D. Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings: for field finishing of doors.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural

Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada.

B. ANSI A208.1: Particleboard.

C. DHI-A115-W: Wood Door Hardware Standards, Hardware Preparation.

D. DHI-WDHS-3: Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and

characteristics.

C. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts

required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory

finishing criteria, identify cutouts for glazing.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated,

Section 1300, Custom Grade.

B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section

with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.

B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or

wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with

tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weather

tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining

ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the

construction period.

04-27-11 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08211 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

1.08 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01700 - Execution Requirements for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide warranty for the following term:

1. Interior Doors: Life of installation.

C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,

defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WOOD DOOR SUPPLIER

A. Wood doors are to be furnished by the General Contactor through Twin City Hardware as part

of the current BWW Door and Hardware Package.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

Twin City Hardware Company

723 Hadley Avenue North

Oakdale, MN 55128

651-735-2200

A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:

1. Lynden Door Inc: www.lyndendoor.com

2.03 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.

B. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2, made with binder containing no ureaformaldehyde

resin.

2.04 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. (Wood Doors): Interior 1-3/4” Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces.

2. Species: Select White Maple.

3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced).

4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.

5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.

6. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces.

7. Core: Particleboard.

8. Construction: 5 or 7 ply. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive

planed before veneering.

2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.

B. Cores Constructed with Stiles and Rails: Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware

reinforcement.

C. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.

D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with

hardware requirements and dimensions.

E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge

clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. Doors to be field finished.

04-27-11 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08211 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

F. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1700.

2.06 FIELD FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS

A. Refer to Section 09900 for field finishing of wood doors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or

alignment.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.

B. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges a maximum of 3/4 of an inch (19 mm).

C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.

D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.

3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.

B. Conform to specified quality standard for maximum diagonal distortion.

C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, top to

bottom, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area.

D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to

edge, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.

B. Adjust closers for full closure.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08211 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 08310 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Access panel and frame units, non-fire-rated, in ceiling and soffit locations.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 07424 - Aluminum Composite Panel System.

B. Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation Finish System: Openings in exterior EIFS surfaces.

C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Openings in drywall ceilings and walls.

D. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field paint finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Access Panel Manufacturers:

1. Milcor Inc: www.milcorinc.com.

2. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com

3. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com

4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 ACCESS PANEL UNITS

A. (AP) Access Panels:

1. Milcor Style DW with drywall flange.

2. Milcor Style K with plaster type flange for EIFS.

3. Milcor Style ME with exposed flange.

4. Comparable products from the other specified manufacturers.

B. Sizes: As indicated on the drawings.

C. Hardware:

1. Hinge: 175 degree stainless steel piano hinge with removable pin.

2. Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock.

D. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard prime coat, to be field painted under Section 09900.

2.03 ACCESS PANEL AT ENTRY CANOPY

A. (AP) Entry Canopy Access Panel: Steel access panel with 1 inch deep recessed door for

installation in ceiling of entry canopy. Door panel infill to be plywood filler and aluminum

composite panel to match finish of canopy.

1. Acudor Model No. AT-5020.

2. Milcor Model No. 3205-030.

B. Sizes: 24 inch x 24 inch.

C. Hardware:

1. Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock.

D. Finish:

1. Galvanized, hot dipped finish.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Weld, fill, and grind joints to ensure flush and square unit.

04-27-11 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

08310 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.

C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.

D. Provide shimming as necessary so that plaster screed is positioned to match thickness of

surrounding finish system.

E. Installation of surface mounted wall unit through adhered roofing membrane: Set flange in

continuous sealant. Provide weatherstrip on all edges and aluminum rain drip applied to top

edge.

F. Installation of panels in EIFS as applicable: Install prior to finish coat of EIFS.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF ENTRY CANOPY ACCESS PANEL

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Securely fasten access panel in wood frame opening. Set frame at height so that aluminum

composite panel infill will be flush with finished composite panel system of canopy.

C. Adhesively apply backer sheet of plywood and composite panel sheet in door recess.

Composite panel should set flush with canopy finish.

D. Coordinate installation of access panel with installation of composite panel system. Refer to

Section 07424 Aluminum Composite Panel System for specific panel system installed at

canopy.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

08310 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 08380 - TRAFFIC DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Double-acting, self-closing traffic doors.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 08110 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Traffic door frames.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TRAFFIC DOOR SUPPLIER

A. Traffic Doors in this section to be furnished by the General Contactor through Twin City

Hardware as part of the current BWW Door and Hardware Package.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

Twin City Hardware Company

723 Hadley Avenue North

Oakdale, MN 55128

651-735-2200

A. Chase Industries, Inc., 800-543-4455, www.chasedoors.com.

2.03 TRAFFIC DOORS

A. (TD) Traffic Door: Chase Model # SC-3018 solid core traffic door.

1. Core: 3/4” thick, 7-ply plywood.

2. Door Faces: Plastic laminate.

a. Black: Formica Black 909-58, Dining/Public side of door.

b. White: Formica White 949-58, Kitchen side of door.

3. Hardware: Chase “E” series stainless steel adjustable gravity close hardware system.

4. Vision Panel: 9 x 14 inches, clear acrylic glazing with black rubber molding. Center window

at 60” above floor.

5. Impact Plates: 18” high, 18ga stainless steel impact plates both sides of door. Impact

plates to set flush with door edge trim.

6. Edge Trim: 18ga stainless steel channel edge trim, all sides of door.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that door frames are plumb, secured to substrate and ready for installation of door.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install traffic doors with necessary hardware and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's

written installation instructions.

B. Install doors plumb and level and properly aligned in door frame.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Lubricate and adjust doors for smooth operation and proper closing.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 TRAFFIC DOORS

08380 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Aluminum storefront framing.

B. Aluminum window framing.

C. Aluminum doors and frames.

SECTION 08410 – METAL FRAMED STOREFRONTS

D. Door hardware for aluminum doors less cylinders.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.

B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: for additional hardware items provided under Owner’s Door

and Hardware Package.

C. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American

Architectural Manufacturers Association.

B. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

C. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric].

D. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

E. ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric].

F. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the

Specimen.

G. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,

Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

H. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,

Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

I. BHMA A 156 – Standards for Builders Hardware.

J. SSPC-Paint 12: Paint Specification No. 12: Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film).

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Design and construct framing systems and associated systems to

comply with performance requirements specified and applicable building code requirements for

this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects

in construction.

B. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or

permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design

wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.

1. Positive Design Wind Load: 25 lbf/sq ft.

2. Negative Design Wind Load: 25 lbf/sq ft.

04-27-11 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

08410 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

3. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with

full recovery of glazing materials.

C. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection

of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.

D. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,

measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in

accordance with ASTM E 283.

E. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure

difference of 2.86 lbf/sq ft.

F. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any

water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture

occurring within system.

G. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly,

primarily in line with inside pane of glass and inner sheet of infill panel and heel bead of glazing

compound.

H. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components

caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F. over a 12 hour period without causing

detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements.

1. Estimated spacing of vertical mullion movement joints: 20 feet.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction,

specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation

procedures.

C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems

with minimum five years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized installers who are trained and approved for

installation of the following systems required for this Project.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.

B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed

coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this

minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01700 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.

Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.

04-27-11 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

08410 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

1. Vistawall Architectural Products; Series 3000T: www.vistawall.com

2. Kawneer North America; Product Trifab 451/451T: www.kawneer.com

3. United States Aluminum Corp; FT451: www.usalum.com

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B209M).

C. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

D. Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members.

E. Perimeter Sealant: Type A specified in Section 07900.

F. Glass: As specified in Section 08800.

G. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration

requirements.

H. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08800.

I. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.03 ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEM

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded or formed aluminum framing members of

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally broken.

2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.

3. Glazing Plane: Center glazed to accept 1/4" and 1” insulated glass.

4. Profile: 2” x 4-1/2”.

5. Finish: Clear Anodized Finish; AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I.

2.04 ALUMINUM SWING DOORS

A. Exterior Doors: Nominal 2” deep, medium stile aluminum doors, with 3/16” wall thickness and

nominal 3-1/2" wide stiles, 6" nominal top rail and actual 10" high bottom rail. Door units to be

fabricated complete with hardware as indicated in Hardware Schedule.

1. Doors to be glazed with the following glass units: Refer to Section 08800 for glass units.

a. 1/4 inch clear tempered glass units, (GL1), in interior doors.

b. 1 inch insulated, clear glass units, (GL2), in exterior doors and transom.

2. Glazing Stops: Non-removable from the exterior side, snap-in type, square, extruded

aluminum sections with vinyl or neoprene glazing inserts. Form neat hairline joints.

3. Finish: Same as storefront.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

1. Vistawall Architectural Products; MS-375 Rugged Medium Stile Door.

2. Kawneer North America; 350 Heavy Wall Door.

3. United States Aluminum Corp; Durafront Series 800 Medium Stile Door.

2.05 DOOR HARDWARE

A. Refer to Hardware Schedule at the end of this section.

04-27-11 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

08410 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

B. Hinges: BHMA 156.1, butt type, ball bearing, non-removable pin on exterior outswinging doors.

1. Hinge Size: 2 inch doors / 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches.

2. Finish: US26D for interior doors and US32D for exterior doors.

C. Exit Devices: BMHA 156.3, Grade 1.

1. Provide on exterior pairs of doors.

2. Keyed lock cylinder on outside of door by Section 08710.

3. Keyed dogging cylinders by Section 08710.

3. Finish: US26D.

4. Manufacturer: Von Duprin 99 Series with concealed vertical rods.

D. Push/Pull Set: BHMA 156.6.

1. Provide on each interior door and provide pull on exterior of exterior pair of doors.

2. Finish: US32D.

3. Note: Coordinate and match Pull design on projects that have existing mall hardware

design and finish.

E. Closers: Universal mounting and multi-sized modern surface type with full cover, sized for

individual door sizes and locations, (unless other types are required by special conditions.

1. Provide 110 degree arm.

2. Provide with cushion stop for exterior doors.

3. Finish: AL.

F. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all exterior doors.

1. Finish: AL.

G. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, of neoprene; provide on all exterior doors.

1. Finish: AL.

H. Threshold: ADA compliant extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface;

provide on all exterior doors.

1. Finish: AL.

2.06 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of

assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.

B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.

C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.

D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar

metals with bituminous paint.

E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.

F. Reinforce components internally for door hardware.

G. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.

H. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.

1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in

completed assemblies, including joint edges.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.

B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of

this section.

04-27-11 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

08410 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install framing system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and

other irregularities.

C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.

D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional

tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.

E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.

F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.

G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.

H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal

barrier.

I. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.

J. Install operable door units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust

weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.

K. Install hardware using templates provided.

L. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, using glazing method required to achieve

performance criteria.

M. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07900.

N. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be

satisfactorily repaired.

O. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact

surfaces with bituminous paint.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft,

whichever is less.

B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.

B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean

wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.

C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

04-27-11 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

08410 -5


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

GROUP 1: Interior Entry Vestibule Doors – Door No. 02

3 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB or Comparable

2 Pull 535B 8” CTC Hiawatha

2 Push Bar 1081 LBP Hiawatha

2 Closer 1461 x 110 degree LCN

Refer to Section 08710 – Door Hardware for Balance of Hardware for Group 1 provided

by Hardware Supplier. Floor Stops.

GROUP 2: Exterior Entry and Dining “B” (Patio) Doors – Door No.s 01 and 15

3 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP PBB or Comparable

1 Exit Device CD3347NL (Concealed Vertical Rods) Von Duprin

1 Exit Device CD3347EO(Concealed Vertical Rods) Von Duprin

2 Offset Pull 658 8” CTC Hiawatha

2 Closer 1461 x cush arm stop x 110 degree LCN

1 set Weatherstrip Reese

2 Door Sweep 323 x 36” Reese

1 Threshold S245A x 72” Reese

Refer to Section 08710 – Door Hardware for Balance of Hardware for Group 2 provided

by Hardware Supplier. Cylinders and Floor Stops.

GROUP 14: Bar (Patio) Door – Door No. 19

1-1/2 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP PBB or Comparable

1 Exit Device CD33EO Von Duprin

1 Pull 535B 8” CTC Hiawatha

1 Closer 1461 x cush arm stop x 110 degree LCN

1 set Weatherstrip Reese

1 Door Sweep 323 x 36” Reese

1 Threshold S245A x 36” Reese

Refer to Section 08710 – Door Hardware for Balance of Hardware for Group 14 provided

by Hardware Supplier. Cylinder and Floor Stop.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

08410 -6


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Commercial door hardware furnished by General Contractor from Owner’s Door and Hardware

Supplier.

B. Aluminum Door Hardware: Hardware for manual aluminum doors, except cylinders and door

stops, are furnished and installed under Section 08410. Installation of cylinders and door stops

under the work of this Section.

C. Installation of Owner Furnished construction and permanent cores.

D. Installation of hardware components.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Custom Fabricated Gates.

B. Section 08110 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

C. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors.

D. Section 08410 - Metal-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for aluminum doors.

1.03 OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS

A. Owner Furnished Cores and Keys: Construction and permanent interchangeable cores and

keys will be provided By Owner for installation by General Contractor.

1. Coordinate delivery of cores to project site with Owner.

B. Padlocks: Owner will provide padlocks for gates, coolers and roof hatch.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI) and Builders Hardware Manufacturers

Association:

1. ANSI/BHMA A156, Door Hardware Standards.

2. ICC/ANSI A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

B. Door and Hardware Institute, (DHI).

C. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA):

1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.

2. NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Fire Windows.

3. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.

4. NFPA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Underwriters Laboratories, (UL):

1. UL, "Building Materials Directory".

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Hardware Schedule: Prepared by the Hardware Supplier, indicating a listing of each hardware

component for each door opening.

1. Organization: Hardware Schedule to be organized to follow the same numbering order as

Door Schedule on Drawings.

2. Hardware schedule to be coordinated with Door and Frame Schedule for Hollow Metal

Doors and Frames and Wood Doors.

04-27-11 DOOR HARDWARE

08710 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door

hardware.

B. Installer Qualifications: Workers trained and approved to install commercial door hardware and

electrified door hardware as required.

C. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with accessibility requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),

"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)" and ANSI A117.1.

2. Comply with NFPA 101 for means of egress doors.

3. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80

that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to

match hardware schedule.

1. Include basic installation instructions, mounting diagram and applicable wiring diagrams.

B. Inventory door hardware on receipt at project site and provide secure lock-up for door hardware

delivered to Project site.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of

internal reinforcement for door hardware.

B. Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory

prepared for installing door hardware.

C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware

with connections as required.

D. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 HARDWARE SUPPLIER

A. Hardware components in this section are to be furnished by the General Contactor through

Twin City Hardware as part of the current BWW Door and Hardware Package.

Twin City Hardware Company

723 Hadley Avenue North

Oakdale, MN 55128

651-735-2200

2.02 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL

A. Door hardware for each door to comply with requirements of this section and door Hardware

Groups indicated in Part 3, Hardware Schedule.

B. Provide hardware components that are new, free from scratches, mars and other defects.

Furnish hardware complete with accessories of proper size and design required for the purpose

intended, including screws, shields, and other anchorage devices necessary for complete

installation.

04-27-11 DOOR HARDWARE

08710 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

2.03 DOOR HARDWARE COMPONENTS AND FINISHES

A. Hinges: BHMA 156.1, butt type, ball bearing, non-removable pin on exterior outswinging doors.

1. Manufacturer: PBB.

2. Hinge Size: 1-3/4 inch doors / 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches.

3. Spring Hinge: Self-closing hinges, BHMA 156.17, 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches.

4. Finish: US26D for interior doors and US32D for exterior doors.

B. Lock and Latch Sets: Cylindrical Locks, BHMA A156.2, Grade 1, prepared to accept “Insta-Key”

interchangeable cores.

1. Manufacturer: Schlage; ND Series.

2. Lever Handle Trim Design: Schlage “Rhodes”.

3. Finish: US26D.

4. Manufacturer: Schlage; AL Series.

5. Lever Handle Trim Design: Schlage “Saturn”.

6. Finish: US26D.

C. Cylinders: BHMA 156.2, Grade 1, prepared to accept “Insta-Key” interchangeable cores.

1. Manufacturer: Schlage.

2. Finish: US26D.

D. Exit Alarm Locks: BMHA 156.3, Grade 1.

1. Manufacturer: Von Duprin; Guard – X, Series 2670.

2. Finish: US28.

E. Panic Exit Devices: BMHA 156.3, Grade 1. Rim exit device with exit alarm, weatherized.

1. Manufacturer: Detex; Value Series, V40.

2. Finish: Black Anodized Aluminum.

F. Push/Pull Sets: BHMA 156.6.

1. Manufacturer: Hiawatha.

2. Finish: US32D.

G. Closers: Universal mounting and multi-sized modern surface type with full cover, sized for

individual door sizes and locations, (unless other types are required by special conditions.

1. Manufacturer: LCN.

2. Provide 110 degree arm.

3. Provide with cushion stop for exterior doors.

4. Finish: AL.

5. Maximum force to operate doors shall not exceed 8.5 pounds for exterior doors and 5

pounds for interior doors. Fire rated doors to be set to minimum operating force to allow

positive latching when closed.

H. Flush Bolts: BHMA 156.16, manual flush bolt, 12 inch long rod length.

1. Manufacturer: Ives.

2. Finish: US26D.

I. Double Coat Hooks: Brushed aluminum double wardrobe hook.

1. Manufacturer: Ives.

2. Finish: US92, aluminum clear coated.

J. Hinge Pin Stops:

1. Manufacturer: Ives.

2. Finish: US15, satin nickel plated.

K. Wall Stops: Concave design, with dry wall anchor.

1. Manufacturer: Don-Jo Manufacturing.

2. Finish: US32D.

04-27-11 DOOR HARDWARE

08710 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

L. Floor Stops:

1. Manufacturer: Ives.

2.. Models:

a. 446PA28, US28, Aluminum.

b. FS18S, no finish.

M. Door Viewers: Solid Brass one way viewers.

1. Manufacturer: Ives.

2. Finish: US26D.

N. Kick Plates/Armor Plates: BHMA 156.6, 0.050" thick, BHMA 630, Type 304 stainless steel

plates.

1. Manufacturer: Hiawatha.

2. Finish: US32D.

O. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors.

1. Manufacturer: Reese.

2. Finish: AL.

P. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, of neoprene; provide on all exterior doors.

1. Manufacturer: Reese.

2. Finish: AL.

Q. Thresholds: ADA compliant extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface;

provide on all exterior doors.

1. Manufacturer: Reese/Hiawatha.

2. Finish: AL.

R. Rain Drips: Mill aluminum drip cap continuous over full width of door frame head with 2-1/2”

projection.

1. Manufacturer: Reese.

2. Finish: AL.

2.04 DOOR SIGNAGE

A. Special Signage: When required, provide vinyl self-adhesive signage reading, "NOT AN EXIT".

Font shall be non-serif, 2 inches minimum in height, red letters on white background. Comply

with the requirements of the local code authority.

2.05 KEYING

A. Door Locks: Master keyed.

1. Include construction keying.

B. Supply keys in the following quantities:

1. Six master keys.

2. Two construction keys.

3. Two change keys for each lock.

4. Two removable core control keys.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on

mounting diagrams.

B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct

characteristics.

04-27-11 DOOR HARDWARE

08710 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.

B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.

C. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As

recommended by the Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association and DHI.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE

A. Install hardware according to hardware supplier’s written installation instructions, mounting

drawings and wiring diagrams included in hardware packages using experienced personnel.

Maintain fire rating on labeled openings as applicable.

B. Completely fit hardware before final coat of paint or other finish is applied, and then remove until

final finish coat is applied. Perform mortises and cutting neatly, and conceal evidence of cutting

in finished work. Permanently install hardware after finishing operations are complete and dry.

Protect from scratching or other damage.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper

operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as

intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and

ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

GROUP 1: Interior Entry Vestibule Doors – Door No. 02

2 Floor Stops 446FS28 Ives

Refer to Section 08410 – Metal Framed Storefronts for Balance of Hardware for Group 1

provided by Storefront Manufacturer.

GROUP 2: Exterior Entry and Dining “B” (Patio) Doors – Door Nos. 01 and 15

1 Rim Cylinder Schlage

2 Mortise Cylinders for cylinder dogging Schlage

2 Floor Stops 446FS28 Ives

Refer to Section 08410 – Metal Framed Storefronts for Balance of Hardware for Group 2

provided by Storefront Manufacturer.

04-27-11 DOOR HARDWARE

08710 -5


Buffalo Wild Wings

GROUP 3: Restroom Doors – Door Nos. 03 and 07

1-1/2 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB

1 Pull/Plate 535B 8” CTC x 200D 3.5” x 15” Hiawatha

1 Push Plate 200F 4” x 16” Hiawatha

1 Closer 1461 x hold open x 110 degree LCN

1 Kick Plate B3E 10” x 34” Hiawatha

1 Wall Stop 1407 DON

GROUP 4: Office – Door No. 10

1-1/2 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB

1 Lockset ND80BD Rhodes x less core Schlage

I/C core by Owner

1 Closer 1461 x 110 degree LCN

1 Kick Plate B3E 10” x 34” Hiawatha

1 Wall Stop 1407 DON

1 Security Window 10” x 10” in door AIR

1 Metal Louver 18” x 12” in door AIR

GROUP 5: Family Restroom – Door No. 20

1-1/2 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP PBB

1 Lockset N40 Rhodes x privacy Schlage

1 Closer 1461 x Hold Open x 110-degree NCN

1 Wall Stop 1407 DON

3 Silencer Rubber Door Silencer Q146-2500 STL

1 Kick Plate 10” x 34” x 0.050” B3E Hiawatha

GROUP 6: Exterior Service Doors - Door Nos. 11 and 14

1-1/2 pair Hinges 4B51 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP PBB

1 Exit Alarm Lock 2670 x less core Von Duprin

1 Rim Cylinder 80-129 Schlage

1 Closer 1461 Cush x 110 degree LCN

1 Viewer 698B Ives

1 Armor Plate KP 36” x 40” Hiawatha

1 set Weatherstrip DS75 x 4070 Reese

1 Door Sweep 377A x 42” Reese

1 Threshold S245A x 42” Reese

1 Rain Drip R201A x 46” Reese

GROUP 7: Restroom Stall Doors – Door Nos. 4, 5, 6, and 8

1 Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB

2 Spring Hinge SP81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB

1 Latchset AL40 Saturn x Privacy Schlage

2 Hinge Pin Stop 69F15 Ives

1 Wall Stop 1407 DON

1 Dbl. Coat Hook 582A92 Ives

Note: Provide (2) two additional dbl. coat hooks for Purse Shelf in Women’s Restroom.

04-27-11 DOOR HARDWARE

08710 -6


Buffalo Wild Wings

GROUP 8: Rear Vestibule (Interior) - Door No. 13

1-1/2 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB

1 Lockset ND80BD Rhodes x less core Schlage

I/C core by Owner

1 Closer 1461 x 110 degree LCN

2 Hinge Pin Stop 69F15 Ives

1 Kick Plate B3E 10” x 34” Hiawatha

GROUP 9: Mechanical Room – Door No. 18

3 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP PBB

1 Lockset ND80BD Rhodes x less core Schlage

I/C core by Owner

1 Closer 1461 x 110 degree LCN

1 Flush Bolt FB458 12” Ives

1 Threshold 425S x 72” Hiawatha

GROUP 10: Patio Gates – Door Nos. 16 and 17

1 Panic Device V40xEBxWx36” Detex

1 Mortise Cylinder 80-102 x less core Schlage

Balance of Hardware by Gate Manufacturer

2 Hinges Steel Weld-on Barrel Hinges

GROUP 11: Traffic Doors – Door Nos. 9 and 12

All Mounting Hardware by Door Manufacturer

GROUP 12: Coat Hooks – Bar Stool Area

8 Dbl. Coat Hook 582A92 Ives

GROUP 13: Padlocks – Keg Storage, Trash & Chemical Enclosure & Roof Hatch

6 Padlocks By Owner Insta-Key

GROUP 14: Bar (Patio) Door – Door No. 19

1 Mortise Cylinder for cylinder dogging Schlage

1 Floor Stop 446FS28 Ives

Refer to Section 08410 – Metal Framed Storefronts for Balance of Hardware for Group 14

provided by Storefront Manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 DOOR HARDWARE

08710 -7


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 08800 - GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Clear tempered glass.

B. Insulated spandrel glass for windows.

C. Clear insulated glass for entrances storefronts and windows.

D. Un-framed tempered glass mirrors.

E. Tinted window film.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01700 – Execution Requirements: for final cleaning of glass and mirrors.

B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material.

C. Section 08110 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: for one-way mirror glass provided under

Hardware Package.

D. Section 08410 - Metal-Framed Storefronts.

E. Section 10810 – Toilet Accessories: for framed mirrors.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.

B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings,

Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.

C. ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,

Setting Blocks, and Spacers.

D. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

E. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.

F. ASTM C 1048: Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and

Uncoated Glass.

G. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

H. ASTM C 1503: Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror.

I. ASTM E 2190: Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation

J. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads

(where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following:

defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain

watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing

with certification label. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and

safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

04-27-11 GLAZING

08800 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Fabricators for Glass:

1. AFG Industries, Inc: www.afgglass.com.

2. Guardian Industries Corporation: www.guardian.com.

3. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppg.com.

4. Oldcastle Glass: www.oldcastle.com

5. Viracon: www.viracon.com.

6. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MONOLIHIC GLASS

A. (GL1): Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Condition A uncoated, Type I, Class 1, q3 quality,

horizontally tempered, clear float glass.

1. 1/4" thick; clear, tempered.

2.03 MIRROR GLASS

A. (GL4): Tempered Mirror Glass: ASTM C1048, Condition A uncoated, Type I, Class 1, q3 quality,

horizontally tempered, clear float glass before silver coating is applied.

1. 1/4" thick; Mirror glazing quality, tempered,

2. Refer to drawings for locations for un-framed mirrors in Women’s Restroom and Back Bar

areas.

B. (GL5): One-way Mirror Glass: Refer to Section 08110 – Steel Doors and frames for one-way

glass installed in steel door provided by Twin City Hardware under current Hardware Package.

2.04 INSULATED GLASS

A. (GL2): Insulated Glass Units: 1 inch thick unit constructed of 1/4 inch clear exterior light, 1/2

inch air space, and 1/4 inch clear interior light. Low-emissivity coating on No. 2 surface. Both

lights heat strengthened (tempered where necessary to comply with safety code requirements).

1. Visible transmittance: 70 percent.

2. Outside reflectance: 10 percent.

3. Nighttime winter U-value: 0.29 BTU/hour/square foot. Maximum.

4. Summer U-value: 0.26 BTU/hour/square foot. Maximum.

5. Shading coefficient: 0.43. Maximum.

6. Relative heat gain: 90 BTU/hour/square foot.

7. Acceptable products:

a. Viracon: VE1-2M.

b. Comparable products of other specified manufacturers that meet or exceed

performance characteristics of specified glass.

B. (GL3): Insulated Spandrel Glass Units: 1 inch thick unit constructed of 1/4 inch clear exterior

light with ceramic frit on No. 2 surface, 1/2 inch air space, and 1/4 inch clear interior light. Both

lights heat strengthened (tempered where necessary to comply with safety code requirements).

1. Ceramic Frit Color: Black.

2.05 TINTED WINDOW FILM

A. Manufacturers and Product:

1. (TF1): 3M Sun Control Window Films.

a. Product: Prestige Series, PR 70.

b. Manufacturer: 3M Corporation; Renewable Energy Division; www.3m.com

c. Contact: John Aguzino, 1-800-229-1566.

04-27-11 GLAZING

08800 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

B. Locations: Interior Entry Aluminum Door # 02, Patio Aluminum Doors # 15 and # 19; applied to

interior surface of glass after signage is installed.

2.06 GLAZING COMPOUNDS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Dow Corning Corp: www.dowcorning.com.

2. GE Plastics: www.geplastics.com.

3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.

4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore

A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning.

C. Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of

properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A,

and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected.

D. Coordinate compatibility of silicone sealants specified in section 07900 with sealants used for

insulated glass edge seals.

2.07 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.

Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet

space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.

Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self

adhesive on one face.

C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15

Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; size as required; black color.

D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM

C 864 Option I; Black color.

E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.

F. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting

mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with

glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.

G. Mirror Clips: Manufacturers standard top and bottom mirror clips fabricated to mechanically

fasten mirrors to wall surface and allow for removal of mirrors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.

B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may

impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.

C. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.

D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

04-27-11 GLAZING

08800 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)

A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.

B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to

attain full contact.

C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous

contact.

3.04 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING)

A. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing

junctions with butyl sealant.

B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.

C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full

contact.

D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous

contact.

E. Trim protruding tape edge.

3.05 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)

A. Install Owner supplied 1/4 inch logo glass as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)

above sight line.

C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.

D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.

E. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.

F. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous

contact.

G. Knife trim protruding tape.

3.06 MIRROR INSTALLATION

A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with

referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids

distorting reflected images.

B. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and/or mirror clips as applicable. Attach

mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors

or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of

mirrors.

1. Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling of

mirror edges. Locate clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced.

2. Install mastic as follows:

a. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and

to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

b. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum

air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface.

C. Refer to Drawings for wood trim mirror frames.

04-27-11 GLAZING

08800 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.07 TINTED WINDOW FILM INSTALLATION

A. Application: Apply window film using manufacturer’s trained and certified installers in strict

accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

B. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel in proper cleaning of window surface after installation in

accordance with manufacturers instructions.

3.08 CLEANING

A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.

B. Remove labels after Work is complete.

C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 GLAZING

08800 -5


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Metal furring and lathing.

SECTION 09220 – PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO)

B. Portland cement plaster system (Stucco).

C. Smooth and special rendered surface finish.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.

B. Section 07260 - Air Barriers.

C. Section 07920 - Joint Sealers.

D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

E. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit data on plaster materials, characteristics and limitations of products

specified.

C. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,

and suggested schedule for cleaning.

D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating finish color and texture to match

existing material.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C150 – Portland Cement

B. ASTM C206 – Finishing Hydrated Lime

C. ASTM C932 – Bonding Compounds for adhering plaster to concrete or concrete unit masonry

D. ASTM C926 – Standard specification for application of Portland Cement based Plaster

E. ASTM C897 – Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement Based Plasters

F. ASTM C1063 – Specifications for installation of lathing and furring to receive interior and

exterior Portland Cement Plaster

G. PCA (Portland Cement Association) – Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) Manual

H. ACI (American Concrete Institute) ACI 524R – “Guide to Portland Cement Plastering”

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform work in accordance with PCA Plaster (Stucco) Manual and applicable manufacturer’s

performance guidelines.

1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Fabricate vertical elements to limit finish surface to 1/180 deflection under lateral point load of

100 lbs.

04-27-11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO)

09220 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

B. Fabricate horizontal elements to limit finish surface to 1/240 deflection under superimposed

dead load and wind uplift loads.

1.07 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a minimum of three

years experience and / or approved by manufacturer.

1.08 MOCKUP

A. Provide mockup of plaster system with accessories.

B. Construct mockup, 4 feet long by 4 feet wide, illustrating surface finish and color to match

existing.

C. Locate where directed by Owner.

D. Mockup may remain as part of the Work.

1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Comply with ASTM C926 requirements

B. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 40° F or above

100°F for 48 hours before, during and after stucco applications and until materials can be fully

cured.

C. Apply stucco to clean, adequately prepared surfaces free from dust, dirt or other deleterious

substances.

D. Provide adequate protection from contaminates and the weather for substrates prior to

application of stucco and for stucco coat applications. Maintain in place until stucco is

adequately cured.

E. Protect stucco surfaces from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry or windy

weather. Use procedures required by climatic conditions including moist curing, providing

coverings and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind.

F. Take necessary care to identify and protect adjacent surfaces from damage from stucco

application and promptly remove all droppings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. This specification is written on the basis of using the products of Degussa Wall Systems /

Senergy, Such is intended to establish minimum quality standards, not to limit competitive

bidding. Products with equal or superior characteristics by other manufacturers will be

considered under conditions of the Specifications.

2.02 PLASTER BASE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1 Portland.

B. Lime: Special finishing hydrated lime, ASTM C-206, Type S.

C. Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand, in accordance with ASTM C897.

D. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster.

E. Bonding Agent: ASTM C932; type recommended by manufacturer for bonding plaster to

concrete masonry surfaces.

F. Plaster Sand: Must be clean and free from deleterious amounts of loam, clay, silt, soluble salts

and organic matter. Sampling and testing must comply with ASTM C144.

04-27-11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO)

09220 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

G. Senergy STUCCOBASE Concentrate: Factory-blended stucco mixture of Portland cement,

reinforcing fibers, and proprietary ingredients for scratch and brown coats. Sampling and testing

must comply with ASTM 926 and ICC ESR-1094.

H. Senergy ALPHA BASE COAT (A/ BC): 100% acrylic polymer base coat, site mixed with

Portland cement. To attach and reinforce optional EPS shapes over face of dried stucco.

I. Reinforcing Mesh: Open weaved, glass fiber reinforcing mesh for reinforcing optional EPS

shapes.

2.03 PLASTER FINISH MATERIALS

A. Cement: As specified for plaster base coat, pure white color.

B. Lime: As specified for plaster base coat.

C. Color Pigment: Synthetic type, color "Pure White".

D. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster.

E. Primer (if needed): Senergy STUCCO PRIME: 100% acrylic based primer for stucco.

F. Finish: Senergy SENERFLEX: Factory mixed formulation of 100% acrylic polymers and

aggregate, integrally pigmented and formulated for specific textures. Color to be determined.

2.04 FURRING AND LATHING

A. Metal Lath at Walls: ASTM C841 and C847; flat diamond self furring mesh with ASTM A653A

G60 hot dip, galvanized zinc coating, 3.4 lb/sq. yd. of weight to suit application.

B. Metal Lath at Soffits: ASTM C841 and C847; Flat Diamond non-furred and non-backed mesh

with ASTM A653A G60 hot dip, galvanized coating, 3.4 lb/sq. yd.

C. Casing Bead: Formed zinc; minimum 26 gage thick; depth governed by plaster thickness;

maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with square edges.

D. Corner Bead: Formed zinc; minimum 26 ga. thick; depth governed by plaster thickness;

maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with bull nosed edge.

E. Base Screed: Formed zinc; minimum 26 gage thick; depth governed by plaster thickness;

maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with beveled edge.

F. Corner Mesh: Formed zinc; minimum 26 ga. thick; expanded flanges shaped to permit

complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2 inches wide; galvanized finish.

G. Anchorage Accessories: Tie wire, nails, staples, or other approved metal supports, of type and

size to suit application, and to rigidly secure lath and associated metal accessories in place,

galvanized, complying with ASTM C1063.

2.05 CEMENT PLASTER MIXES

A. Mix and proportion cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C926.

B. Mix and proportion Senergy STUCCOBASE in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Finish Coat: Mix Senergy SENERFLEX to ensure a homogeneous consistency. Add water as

needed.

D. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set.

E. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.

F. Add air entrainment admixtures to all coats to provide 5-7 percent entrainment.

G. Protect mixtures from freezing, frost, contamination, and evaporation.

04-27-11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO)

09220 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

H. Do not re-temper mixes after initial set has occurred.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work under this Section.

B. Masonry: Verify joints are cut flush and surface is ready to receive work of this Section. Verify

no bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on masonry surface.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction.

3.03 INSTALLATION - LATHING MATERIALS

A. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports.

B. Lap ends minimum 2 inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports.

C. Lap sides of diamond mesh lath minimum 2 inches.

D. Place 4 inch wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing materials.

Secure rigidly in place.

E. Attach metal lath to supports using fastening method recommended by manufacturer to suit

back-up material.

F. Place strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place.

G. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, return metal lath 3 inches from corner

to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only.

3.04 INSTALLATION - ACCESSORIES

A. All openings, plaster edges or where plaster edges terminate, and provide plaster screeds. Use

vented screed at soffit perimeter and where indicated on drawings.

B. Place corner bead at external wall corners; fasten at outer edges of lath only.

C. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure rigidly in

place.

3.05 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Establish control and expansion joints with back to back casing beads, as located in drawings.

Set both beads over 6 inch wide strip of building wrap tape for air seal continuity.

3.06 PLASTERING

A. Apply Portland cement plaster (stucco) in a three-coat application over metal lath with thickness

not less than 7/8" in locations as indicated on drawings. Scratch, brown and finish coat shall be

applied as follows:

1. First (Scratch) Coat: Shall be applied to metal reinforcement with sufficient material and

pressure so that it is shoved through the metal reinforcement to completely embed the

reinforcement.

a. Thickness of scratch coat shall be approximately 3/8". Before scratch coat has

hardened, it shall be evenly scratched with a standard scratcher to provide good

mechanical key for the second or brown coat.

b. Scratch coat shall be continuously moist cured for not less than 48 hours after

application.

04-27-11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO)

09220 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

2. Second (Brown) Coat: Shall be applied not sooner than 48 hours after application of

scratch coat. Before applying the brown coat, the surfaces of scratch coat shall be

dampened evenly to obtain uniform suction (or fogged as environmental conditions (hot,

dry, sunny days) dictate to properly cure).

a. Thickness of brown coat shall be a minimum of 3/8" total thickness and shall be

applied in two applications or coats, one immediately following the other.

b. Surface shall be brought to a true, even surface by floating or rodding and left

rough, ready to receive finish coat (for acrylic finishes: wood float or darbying the

surface and fill all voids for uniform surface).

c. Brown coat shall be continuously moist for 48 hours after application and then

allowed to dry.

3. Finish coat: Shall be laid out to permit completion of an entire surface in one operation.

If this is impracticable, the plastering shall be carried to some natural breaking point as

approved by the Owner.

a. Finish coat shall be applied not sooner than 5 days after the application of

preceding coat. Before applying finish coat, the surface of preceding coat shall be

dampened evenly to obtain uniform suction.

b. Primer (if needed): Senergy STUCCOPRIME: Apply STUCCOPRIME to the

Senergy STUCCOBASE with either an airless sprayer, roller or brush at rate of

175 – 275 s.f. per gallon.

c. Acrylic Finish Coat: Senergy SENERFLEX: Apply finish directly to

STUCCOBASE or STUCCOPRIME with a clean stainless steel trowel. Maintain a

wet edge on finish by applying and texturing continually over the wall surface.

Work finish to corners, joints or natural breaks and do not allow material to set up

within an uninterrupted wall area. Float finish to achieve final texture.

3.07 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

3.08 CLEAN-UP

A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove related debris from premises.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO)

09220 -5


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Metal framing.

B. Metal framing components for suspended gypsum board ceilings.

C. Standard gypsum board.

D. Mold resistant gypsum board.

E. Cement backer board.

F. Joint treatment and accessories.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wall wind-load-bearing metal stud

framing and related soffit framing.

B. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry: Exterior load bearing wood stud framing and sheathing.

C. Section 07212 – Board and Batt Insulation: for fiberglass insulation used as acoustic insulation.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer

Units.

B. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units.

C. ASTM A 641 - Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.

D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

E. ASTM C 36/C 36M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.

F. ASTM C 475/C 475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing

Gypsum Board.

G. ASTM C 645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members.

H. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.

I. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

J. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the

Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.

K. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.

L. ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.

M. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building

Construction.

N. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association.

04-27-11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

09260 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated

assemblies.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and

finishing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size

and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum

deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf.

1. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C

645 are waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used, the metal is

continuously dimpled, the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness, and

maximum stud heights are determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using

assemblies specified by ASTM C 754.

2. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.

3. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.

4. Insulation Furring: Z shaped for use with board insulation, 1 1/2 inch.

B. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of

sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened as

indicated on drawings.

C. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that

accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing

rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition.

1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity

required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American

Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

2. Material: ASTM A 653/A 653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped

galvanized coating.

2.02 SUSPENDED CEILING COMPONENTS

A. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 12 gauge wire.

B. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch.

C. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 18 gauge wire.

D. Ceiling Channels: 0.0312-inch, (20 Gauge) base metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide

flanges.

1. Depth: 2-1/2 inch.

E. Furring Channels: Hat-Shaped, 2-9/16 inch wide with 1-1/4 inch face.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch, (25 Gauge).

2. Depth: 7/8 inch or 1-1/2 inch, as indicated on Drawings.

2.03 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. G-P Gypsum Corporation: www.gp.com.

2. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.

3. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

04-27-11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

09260 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

B. Gypsum Board - All Types: Complying with applicable requirements of ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

C. (GYB1) Standard Gypsum Board: Not Used

D. (GYB2) Mold and Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board: With moisture and mold-resistant core

and surfaces to comply with ASTM D 3273.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

3. Manufacturers and Products:

a. USG Corporation: Sheetrock Brand “Mold Tough” Gypsum Panels.

b. National Gypsum Company: XP Gypsum Board.

c. G-P Gypsum Corporation: “Mold-Guard Gypsum Board.

2.04 CEMENT BACKER BOARD

A. (GYB5) Cement Backer Board: ANSI A118.9, aggregated Portland cement panels with glass

fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Manufacturers and Products:

a. USG Corporation: Durock.

b. National Gypsum: Permabase.

3. Location: At Kitchen and Toilet walls. Refer to Wall Types.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Corner Beads: Galvanized steel.

B. Edge Trim: Vinyl tape style beads and as detailed.

C. Control Joint: Zinc, v-groove with tape flanges.

D. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project

conditions.

1. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.

2. Chemical hardening type compound.

E. Joint Tape:

1. Standard Paper Tape: 2 inch wide.

a. Interior Gypsum Wallboard except specific products indicated below that require

fiberglass tape.

2. Fiberglass Tape: self-adhesive, glass-fiber mesh. Sheetrock Brand Fiberglass Drywall

Tape or comparable.

a. Interior Mold and Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board.

b. Cement Backer Board.

F. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations.

G. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to

suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.

3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Metal Framing: Comply with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions.

04-27-11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

09260 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

B. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated.

1. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain

clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with

continuous bridging.

2. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance

between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical

devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of stud

connections; do not leave studs unattached to track.

C. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not

less than double 20 gauge studs at jambs.

D. Standard Wall Furring: Install at masonry walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more

than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate

channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center.

E. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet

accessories, and equipment. Comply with Section 06100 and Drawings for wood blocking.

3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A. Acoustic Batt Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around

electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.

1. Refer to Section 07212 for batt insulation (INSUL1).

B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing

members.

2. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and

rough-in boxes.

3. Refer to Section 07900 for (SLNT2) sealant.

C. Install acoustical treatment at interior partitions where indicated on the Drawings.

3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints,

especially in highly visible locations.

B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and

edges occurring over firm bearing.

C. Cement Backing Board: Install over framing members in locations as indicated on drawings,

and in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.

D. Installation on Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.

1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls over 50 feet long and in accordance with the

Drawings.

B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.

C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.

04-27-11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

09260 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.06 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Tape and finish gypsum board surfaces, joints, interior angles, edge trim, control

joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare

gypsum board surfaces for final finish. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent

surfaces.

1. Apply materials strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Pre-fill open joints edges, and damaged surface areas.

3. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not

intended for tape.

4. Finish joints to achieve uniformly smooth, true and satisfactory surface to receive paint or

other scheduled finish material.

5. Sand each coat, keeping sanding to a minimum to avoid raising nap on drywall board.

B. Levels Gypsum Board Finish: as specified under ASTM C 840, and as summarized below:

1. Level 0: (No Finish); Taping, finishing, and trim accessories, (cornerbeads, etc.) are not

required.

2. Level 1: (Tape set in compound); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint

compound. Panel surfaces must be free of excess joint compound, but tool marks and

ridges are acceptable.

3. Level 2: (1 coat ); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound and

immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply one coat of the joint compound

on fastener heads, and flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces must be free of excess

joint compound, but tool marks and ridges are acceptable.

4. Level 3: (2 coat); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound and

immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply one additional coat of the joint

compound over the tape. Apply two separate coats of the joint compound over fastener

heads and flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces and the joint compound must be

smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.

5. Level 4: (3 coat); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound and

immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply two additional separate coats of

the joint compound over flat joints. Apply one additional coat of the joint compound over

interior angles. Apply three separate coats of the joint compound over fastener heads and

flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces and the joint compound must be smooth and

free of tool marks and ridges. "Drywall primer" must be applied to surfaces before applying

final decoration.

6. Level 5: (Skim coat); Finish must be equal to Level 4 (embedding coat and three finish

coats) plus a skim coat over the entire gypsum board surface. Surfaces must be smooth

and free of tool marks and ridges.

a. Note: Level 5 is considered a high-quality gypsum board finish and is recommended

for areas that will receive glossy paint or that are subject to severe lighting conditions.

3.07 GYPSUM BOARD FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE

A. Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view.

B. Level 2: Utility areas and areas behind cabinetry.

C. Level 4: Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive paint finish.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

09260 -5


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Cersmic Wall, Floor and Base Tile.

B. Quarry Tile Floor and Base Tile.

C. Mortar and Grout Materials.

D. Accessory Materials.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

SECTION 09300 - TILE

B. Section 08710 - Hardware: Thresholds at doors.

C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: for wall substrate materials.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the

Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium).

1. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile

in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar.

2. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile

on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement

Mortar.

3. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the

Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured

Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar.

4. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile

with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

5. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile

with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy.

6. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile

with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout.

7. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in

Tilework.

8. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement

Mortar.

9. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement

Grouts for Tile Installation.

10. ANSI A118.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Epoxy Emulsion

Mortar/Grout.

B. TCA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of North America, Inc.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal

methods, and polishes and waxes.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Maintain one copy of TCA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5

years of documented experience.

04-27-11 TILE

09300 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar

materials.

1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide 10 sq. ft of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified.

B. Provide 1 gallon of each floor cleaner.

1. Epoxy grout haze cleaner: Legsolve-it.

2. Heavy grout and stain remover: Texspar and Texspar Plus.

3. Floor cleaner/sealer: Floorshine R20.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TILE SUPPLIER

2.01 TILE

A. Tile components in this section are to be furnished by the General Contactor through RBC Tile

& Stone.

RBC Tile & Stone

1820 Berkshire Lane North

Plymouth, MN 55441

763-559-5531

A. Ceramic Floor, Wall and Base Tile: (CT)

1. (CT-1): 12” x 12” Floor and Wall Tile, Back Bay Iron Range, RBC # EQCP96-1212, Sparta.

2. (CT-2): 6” x 12” Cove Base Tile, BWW Super Black Textured, RBC # BW9235-COVE12,

Black.

3. (CT2a): 1” x 6” Cove Base Out Corner, BWW Super Black Textured, RBC # BW9235-

COVE12OC, Black.

5. (CT-3): 4” x 4” Black Accent Tile, Back Bay BWW Accent #1, RBC # BB10890-44, Black.

4. (CT-4): 4” x 4” Yellow Accent Tile, Back Bay BWW Accent #2, RBC # BB10380-44, Yellow.

B. Quarry Tile Floor and Base Tile: (QT)

1. (QT1): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile with abrasive surface, RBC # OT10A-66, Red.

2. (QT2): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Base, RBC # 10-Q3565, Red.

3. (QT2a): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Right Corner, RBC # 10-QCR3565, Red.

4. (QT2b): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Left Corner, RBC # 10-QCL3565, Red.

2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Bostik USA- Hydroment, 800-726-7845.

B. Mortar Bond Coat Materials:

1. Latex-Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4.

a. Hydroment – Single Flex Modified Thinset – Gray.

2.03 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Bostik USA – Hydroment, 800-726-7845.

B. Standard Grout: Polymer modified cement grout, sanded, as specified in ANSI A118.7.

1. Hydroment Standard Sanded Grout.

2. Color: Char Black, H139S-25.

3. Location: Use for all Ceramic Tile.

04-27-11 TILE

09300 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

C. Epoxy Grout: as specified in ANSI A118.3, water-cleanable, high heat and chemical resistant

modified epoxy emulsion grout; use for floor and base applications in food preparation, bar and

other areas as indicated on drawings.

1. Hydroment Ezpoxy Grout.

2. Color: Char Black, HY9300-404.

3. Location: Use for all Quarry Tile.

2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Waterproof Membrane System: complying with ANSI A118.10 and ANSI A118.12.

1. Laticrete: 9235 Waterproof Membrane System.

2. Bostik USA: Hydroment Black Top 90210.

B. Cement Backer Board: As specified in Section 09260.

C. (T2) Trim:Transition Strips: use with carpet and tile.

1. Schluter Systems, Reno-TK; Finish: Brushed Aluminum.

D. (T3) Trim: Wall Corner Protection: use with tile in restrooms.

1. Schluter Systems, Rondec RO 80 EB, brushed stainless finish.

E. Cleaning Materials:

1. Legge System: Walter G Legge Company, 444 Central Ave., Peekskill, NY 10566; 800-

345-3443; www.leggesystems.com

a. Cementitious grout haze cleaner: Legge Grout Stripper.

b. Epoxy grout haze cleaner: Legsolve-it.

c. Heavy grout and stain remover: Texspar and Texspar Plus.

d. Floor cleaner/sealer: Floorshine R20.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,

are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.

B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of

setting materials to sub-floor surfaces.

C. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect surrounding work from damage.

B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.

C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable

flatness tolerances.

D. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's

instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install tile and thresholds and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1

through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

C. Place thresholds at exposed tile edges.

D. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases

neatly. Align floor, base, and wall joints.

04-27-11 TILE

09300 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

E. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints

watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.

F. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.

G. Install thresholds where indicated.

H. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

I. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.

J. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.

K. Grout tile joints.

L. Clean tile using Legge system grout haze cleaning materials suitable for the grout type. Mix

cleaning materials and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using rotary

scrubber and wet/dry vacuum.

M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.

3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS

A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F113, dryset

or latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated below.

1. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook

Method F122 with epoxy grout.

2. Where epoxy grout is indicated, but not epoxy bond coat, install in accordance with TCA

Handbook Method F115.

3.05 INSTALLATION - WALL AND BASE TILE

A. Install wall corner protection at outside corners of tiled walls in Restrooms.

B. Over cement backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W244.

1. Where adjacent floors are installed with waterproof membrane, wrap membrane 4 inches

up wall, behind base, and out from wall surface 16” unless noted otherwise. Use same tile

installation method as for the floor.

2. Use epoxy grout for base where adjacent floor installation uses epoxy grout.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

B. Apply floor cleaner/sealer.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.

B. Provide two layers of kraft paper over all tile and grout on floors. Tape down and stagger seams

by half the width on second layer.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 TILE

09300 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 09511 - SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.

B. Acoustical units.

C. Egg Crate Ceiling Panel.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 641, Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.

B. ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal

Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.

C. ASTM C 636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.

D. ASTM E 580 - Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical

Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint.

E. ASTM E 1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC

equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Manufacturers:

1. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.

B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E 1264, Class A.

C. (ACT1) Acoustical Panels: Vinyl faced gypsum board, with the following characteristics:

1. Manufacturer and Product: USG ClimaPlus Vinyl, Stipple 3270.

2. Size: 24 x 48 inches.

3. Thickness: 1/2 inches.

4. Composition: Vinyl facing bonded to smooth gypsum board.

5. Edge: Square.

6. Surface Color: White.

7. Surface Pattern: Fine textured, non-perforated.

D. (ACT2) Acoustical Panels: Vinyl faced gypsum board, with the following characteristics:

1. Manufacturer and Product: USG ClimaPlus Vinyl, Stipple 3260.

2. Size: 24 x 24 inches.

3. Thickness: 1/2 inches.

4. Composition: Vinyl facing bonded to smooth gypsum board.

5. Edge: Square.

6. Surface Color: White.

7. Surface Pattern: Fine textured, non-perforated.

04-27-11 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

09511 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

E. (ACT3) Acoustical Panels: Mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type III, with the following

characteristics:

1. Manufacturer and Product: USG, Radar ClimaPlus 2210.

2. Size: 24 x 24 inches.

3. Thickness: 5/8 inches.

4. Composition: Wet felted.

5. Edge: Square.

6. Surface Color: White.

7. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured.

F. (ACT4) Acoustical Panels: Mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type III, with the following

characteristics:

1. Manufacturer and Product: USG, Radar ClimaPlus 2210.

2. Size: 24 x 24 inches.

3. Thickness: 5/8 inches.

4. Composition: Wet felted.

5. Edge: Square.

6. Surface Color: Flat Black, No. 205.

7. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured.

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. (GRID1) Ceiling Suspension System: for (ACT1) and (ACT2); Light Duty grid system meeting

requirements of ASTM C 635 when suspended at 4'-0" o.c. Exposed tee-grid, double web,

aluminum system with 15/16" wide bottom flange.

1. Finish on Suspension System: Baked enamel.

a. Colors: White.

2. Edge Molding: Angle type wall molding with nominal 2" mounting flange by 1" face flange

and hemmed edges. Factory match suspension system finish.

3. Hold Down Clips: Manufacturer’s standard.

4. Acceptable Manufacturer’s and Products:

a. USG; Donn AX Suspension System.

B. (GRID2) Ceiling Suspension System: for (ACT3) and (ACT4); Intermediate Duty grid system

meeting requirements of ASTM C 635 when suspended at 4'-0" o.c. Exposed tee-grid, double

web, hot-dipped galvanized, cold rolled steel system with 15/16" wide bottom flange.

1. Finish on Suspension System: Baked enamel.

a. Colors: White and Black No. 205, in locations to match panel color.

2. Edge Molding: Angle type wall molding with 1" mounting flange by 2" face flange and

hemmed edges. Factory match suspension system finish.

3. Hold Down Clips: Manufacturer’s standard.

4. Acceptable Manufacturer’s and Products:

a. USG; Donn DX/DXL Double Web Grid System.

2.03 EGG CRATE CEILING PANEL

A. Egg Crate Ceiling Panel: 1/2” x 1/2" x 3/8” thick, styrene plastic egg crate panel. 24” x 24”

panel, Color Black.

B. Manufacturers and Products:

1. SLP Lighting; Tel. 800-248-0224; www.slplighting.com; TC500 black styrene eggcrate

louver, 2 x 2.

2. Intersource Specialties Company; 888-782-5011; www.intersourceco.com; Thincell TC –

2 x 2 black styrene.

3. Ridout Plastics Co, Inc.; 800-474-3688; www.eplastics.com; # B/EGG - .375 x 2 x 4 sheet,

Black Styrene.

4. Comparable products from other manufactures meeting specified requirements.

04-27-11 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

09511 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling

system flatness requirement specified.

B. Wire Hangers: Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match suspension system units.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's

instructions and as supplemented in this section.

B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum

deflection of 1:360.

C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.

D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other

work.

E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where

carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.

F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest

affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.

G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load

to exceed deflection capability.

H. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or

support components independently.

I. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.

J. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with

other interruptions.

1. Use longest practical lengths.

2. Overlap and rivet corners.

3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to

appearance and function.

C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.

D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.

E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.

F. Cutting Acoustical Units:

1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.

04-27-11 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

09511 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

G. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding.

H. Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft of public entrance and exit exterior doors.

3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and

suspension system members.

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish

damage.

B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to

permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

09511 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Vinyl base.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM F 1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. (RB) Resilient Base; ASTM F 1861, Type TV, vinyl, thermoplastic; top set Style A, coved

base.

1. Height: 6 inch.

2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.

3. Color: Black.

4. Manufacturers:

a. BurkeMercer Flooring Products: www.burkemercer.com

b. Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com

c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com

d. Armstrong: www.ceilings.com

e. VPI: www.vpicorp.com

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Resilient Base Adhesive: As recommended by material manufacturer for specific material,

location and intended use.

1. VPI No. 600 Acrylic Copolymer Wall Base Adhesive or comparable product from the other

specified base manufacturers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat and are ready to receive vinyl base.

3.02 INSTALLATION - BASE

A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.

B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use pre-molded units. At exposed ends, use premolded

units.

C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.

D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Immediately after installation, remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces

without damage.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 RESILIENT FLOORING

09650 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 09666 - SPECIALTY FLOORING

A. Specialty resilient vinyl flooring with heat welded seams and cove base.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for watertight

application.

C. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,

and suggested schedule for cleaning.

D. Manufacturer installation instructions for watertight applications along with required accessories.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM G-21 Bacteria & Mildew Resistance Excellent

B. ASTM D-751 Breaking Strength (md) 405#

C. ASTM D-751 Breaking Strength (cmd) 723#

D. ASTM D-2407 Coefficient of Friction (avg) Dry.88

E. ASTM D-695 Compressive Strength @ 20% Deformation 641 psi

F. ASTM D-751 Elongation (md) 76.5%

G. ASTM D-751 Elongation (cmd) 88.5%

H. ASTM E-648 Critical Radiant Flux 1.052/cm2

I. ASTM E-648 Burn Distance 12 cm

J. Shore A Hardness 80-85 avg

K. ASTM D-751 Tear Strength (md) 76.5#

L. ASTM D-751 Tear Strength (cmd) 84#

M. NFSI UWT-101A Coefficient of Friction Standard >.06

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor will assure the compliance with 2.03 Job Conditions to allow for proper installation.

B. Comply with governing codes and regulations.

C. Use installers experienced in heat welding Protect-All flooring and approved by manufacturer.

D. Manufacturer's product warranty shall be for a minimum of 10 years coverage.

04-27-11 SPECIALTY FLOORING

09666 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Oscoda Plastics: 5585 N. Huron Ave. P.O. Box 189 Oscoda, MI 48750

2.02 MATERIALS

Phone 800.544.9538

Fax 989.739.1494

e-mail: sales@oscodaplastics.com

www.oscodaplastics.com

A. (SPFL): Specialty Flooring: Protect-All® Specialty Flooring as Manufactured by Oscoda

Plastics®, Inc.

1. Protect-All® Specialty Flooring by Oscoda Plastics®, Inc. Sheets 5' x 5' or 5' x 8' x 1/4”

thick in color chosen from manufacturer's samples.

a. Finish: Matte finish.

b. Color: Light Gray.

2. Accessories:

a. Protect-All® # 127 / # 139 Epoxy Adhesive.

b. Protect-All Seam Welding Rod.

c. Protect-All® 6” Cove Base and Preformed Corners.

d. Protect-All® Aluminum Cove Base Cap.

e. Stainless Steel Drain Rings As Provided By Protect-All®.

f. Sealant provided by Protect-All®.

g. Other installation materials as required and supplied by Oscoda Plastics®, Inc.

2.03 VERIFICATION OF JOB CONDITIONS

A. Proper substrate.

1. Assure that the substrate material / system is suitable for installation of flooring as

indicated by manufacturer.

2. Follow recommendations for the use of curing compounds in concrete sub floors.

3. If required, the installer will verify complete removal of existing finishes to the extent that

proper adhesion will occur.

4. Verify a clean and dry surface to accept adhesive.

5. Use only Portland based patching / filling compounds.

6. Assure that the levelness and smoothness of surface is in compliance with manufacturer

guidelines.

7. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing

for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain

instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. Reference ASTM F 710 - Standard

Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.

B. Environmental Conditions.

1. The contractor and installer of product shall be responsible for providing and maintaining a

proper installation environment.

2. Installation area must be enclosed and watertight with all walls, wall finishes, doors and

floor penetrations in place.

3. Proper acclimation of flooring material is required prior to installation. Minimum of 48 hours.

4. Assure confinement of space during installation and curing of adhesives to prevent other

trades from damaging the product or compromising the adhesion.

5. Maintain a constant temperature during installation and throughout the curing of adhesives.

6. Provide a secure area to store materials for installation.

04-27-11 SPECIALTY FLOORING

09666 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

C. Proper Drain and Other Floor Penetration Elevations.

1. All drains to be installed level and 1/8” above surface of sub-floor.

2. When “dishing” of drain area is specified, the “dish” should not be less than 12” in diameter

and more than 1” in depth. Drain to be 1/8” above floor surface.

3. All other penetrations should be installed 1/8” above surface and provide accommodation

for proper sealant.

4. Penetrations not terminating at floor surface shall be a minimum of 6” above the surface of

floor and be installed in such a way as to not interfere with the installation of the flooring or

the base material and allow adequate space for sealant to be applied to the entire

perimeter.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install specialty flooring per manufacturer's installation requirements and recommendations.

Assure proper conditions for successful performance and installation.

B. Follow manufacturer recommendations for laying out sheets.

C. Flooring shall be cut to within 1/8” of penetrations.

D. Adhere the floor material using manufacturer's recommended adhesive for the particular

substrate type / job conditions and in compliance with spread rate and proper trowel size. Roll

floor into adhesive with 100# roller per manufacturer directions.

E. Install stainless steel drain rings around all drains and other surface penetrations. Rings are to

be routed into floor surface and mounted flush with top of flooring. Secure drain rings using

stainless steel fasteners and lead anchors that will properly anchor the ring to the substrate.

F. Install cove base as recommended by manufacturer with proper adhesive and top sealant.

Heat-weld all seams.

G. Install aluminum cove base cap fastening to wall a minimum of 8” on center using non -

corrosive fasteners that are compatible to secure to wall type.

H. Heat-weld all field material seams using manufacturer's welding rod using proper tools and

installation methods as approved by manufacturer.

I. Transitions in doorways will have stainless steel transitions as provided by manufacturer and

will be routed flush with surface of sheet and fastened 6” on center using stainless steel

fasteners and lead anchors.

J. All exposed edges are to be sealed with manufacturer's recommended sealant to assure a

water tight seal.

3.02 CLEANING

A. Sweep-clean the floor after installation and clear area of scrap materials. Installer shall provide

two copies of manufacturer cleaning recommendations for contractor and owner use.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 SPECIALTY FLOORING

09666 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 09680 - CARPET

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Carpet, direct-glued.

B. Carpet base.

C. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 09300 - Tile: for metal floor transitions from carpet to tile.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and

Rug Institute.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years

experience.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.

B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during and 24 hours

after installation.

C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CARPET MATERIALS

A. (CPT1): Carpet: Custom Carpet for Buffalo Wild Wings.

1. Mohawk, Broadloom, BWW 50545-37907.

B. (Carpet Base): 6” high carpet base with hemmed top edges. Provide lengths required to carpet

vendor.

1. Mohawk, Broadloom, Spectrum V, BC246; Color: XJ7234, Black.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer.

B. Adhesives:

1. Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer.

2. Contact Adhesive: For concrete substrate as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify carpet backing and installation method used in the existing areas to be patched and

matched. Notify Architect if installation method varies from that specified.

B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances which would impair bonding

of adhesives to sub floor surfaces.

04-27-11 CARPET

09680 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Concrete substrate:

1. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps.

2. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler

is cured.

3. Clean substrate.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install carpet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104.

B. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.

C. Lay out carpet:

1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main

traffic.

2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.

3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent

pieces.

4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.

5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.

D. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance.

E. Coordinate with installation of metal floor Transition Strip, (T2), as specified under Section

09300 – Tile.

3.04 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET

A. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.

Apply seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately.

B. Apply adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient open

time, press carpet into adhesive.

C. Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seam

straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.

D. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing.

E. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions.

F. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.

3.05 CARPET BASE INSTALLATION

A. Adhesively apply carpet base with hemmed edges up, to wall surface after floor carpet is

installed. Fit joints tightly together.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage.

B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 CARPET

09680 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 09720 - WALL COVERING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Installation of sheet linoleum wall covering in prefabricated panels.

B. Panels prefabricated furnished by Owner's vendor.

1.02 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature

ranges required by the adhesive or wall covering product manufacturer.

B. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive and wall

covering.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Forbo Flooring.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. (WC1): Forbo Marmoleum, Linoleum Wall Covering, conforming to the following:

1. Pattern: Marmoleum Real.

2. Color: #2939, Black.

3. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to

substrate.

4. Substrate: 1/4 inch thick hardboard. Wall covering sheet mounted to substrate by Owner’s

Millwork Vendor, installation by GC.

A. (T4) Trim: Corner Guard; 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x length as required, PVC corner guard.

1. Color: Black.

2. Locations: Outside corners of WC1 panels.

3. Furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor, installation by GC.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and conform to

requirements of the wall covering manufacturer.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install wallcovering panels with adhesive and hidden mechanical fasteners.

B. Horizontal seams are not acceptable.

C. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants.

B. Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 WALL COVERING

09720 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

SECTION 09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Surface preparation.

B. Field application exterior and interior painting systems.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 04810 - Face Brick (FBR) for paint color match.

B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Shop-primed items.

C. Section 05210 - Metal Joists: Shop-primed items.

D. Section 05310 - Metal Deck: Shop-primed items.

E. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.

F. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Factory primed Fiber Cement Siding and Trim.

G. Section 07240 - (EIFS1) for paint color match.

H. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors: Field finished wood doors.

I. Section 09900 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and

Applications.

2. ASTM D523: Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.

C. Master Painters Institute (MPI): www.paintinfo.com

D. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA):

1. PDCA P4: Responsibilities for Inspection and Acceptance of Surfaces Prior to Painting and

Decorating.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Paint: Paint system materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers,

and other applied materials whether used as primer, intermediate or finish coats, and of various

degrees of opacity or sheen.

B. Sheen: Specular gloss of paint finish as determined in accordance with The Master Painters

Institute (MPI), Guide for use in Defining Gloss and Sheen Levels.

1. Flat: refers to a lusterless or matte finish; MPI Classification “Gloss Level 1”.

a. Gloss range below 5 units when measured at an 60-degree meter.

b. Gloss range below 10 units when measured at an 85-degree meter.

2. Eggshell: refers to low-sheen finish; MPI Classification “Gloss Level 2”.

a. Gloss range below 10 units when measured at an 60-degree meter.

b. Gloss range between 10 and 35 when measured at a 85-degree meter.

3. Satin: refers to low-sheen finish; MPI Classification “Gloss Level 4”.

a. Gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

b. Gloss range 35 units minimum when measured at an 85-degree meter.

04-27-11 PAINTS AND COATINGS

09900 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

4. Semigloss: refers to medium-sheen finish; MPI Classification “Gloss Level 5”.

a. Gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

5. Full Gloss: refers to high-sheen finish; MPI Classification “Gloss Level 6”.

a. Gloss range between 70 and 85 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

C. Paint System (PS#): Two or more coats of paint, generally consisting of a prime coat and one

or more coats of finish paint.

1. Paint system includes surface preparation and required pre-treatment.

D. Color (C#): Identified by a number after an abbreviation "C".

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Color Samples: Submit for approval (2) two paper-backed samples, standard draw-down type,

of each color and sheen combination indicated. Samples will be reviewed for sheen as well as

for color.

1. Clear or semi-transparent wood finishes if specified: Submit on wood specified, as a

complete system with stain if any.

C. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include primers and miscellaneous materials.

1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials.

a. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and

application.

b. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification

and color number.

2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis

and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator's Qualifications: Firm experienced in application or installation of systems similar in

complexity to those required for this Project.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Products must meet current local and federal VOC requirements.

C. Product Identification: Provide manufacturer's product identification on product containers same

as that on final material list. In addition, provide color identification, analysis of contents,

instructions for application and for reducing (if applicable) on containers.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand

code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and

instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90

degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for conditions

under which paint systems can be applied, and the following:

1. Maintain ambient temperature above 50 degrees F. during and 72 hours after installation.

2. Apply water-borne paints when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding

air temperature is between 50 degrees F. and 90 degrees F.

3. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the

surrounding air temperature is between 45 degrees F. and 95 degrees F.

04-27-11 PAINTS AND COATINGS

09900 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

4. Do not apply paint in precipitation, fog or mist, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent,

or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F. above dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.

B. Do not apply paint systems in areas where dust is being generated.

C. Do not apply coatings until moisture content of surface is within limitations recommended by

paint manufacturer. Test with a moisture meter.

D. Provide minimum lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

B. Extra Materials: Furnish (1) one gallon of each color for all major substrates for use by Owner.

1. Label each container with substrate and color in addition to the manufacturer's label.

2. Before Substantial Completion of Work, deliver extra materials to Project and store where

directed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Primers and Paints: Sherwin Williams Co. www.sherwin-williams.com

B. Transparent Finishes: Minwax Co. www.minwax.com

2.02 COLORS

A. All color numbers are from Sherwin Williams unless noted otherwise.

1. (C1): Color to match Ralph Lauren NA-36, “Steeple Chase”, Satin,

SW: Color Accents Custom Formula:

(B1)2Y41, (W1)10/32, (N1)2Y13+1, (R2)9/32, (Y3)41+01

2. (C2): SW #6328, “Fireweed”, Satin

3. (C3): SW #6683, “Bee”, Satin

4. (C4): SW #6991, “Black”, Flat

5. (C5): SW #6991, “Black Magic”, Satin

6. (C6): SW #7006, “Extra White”, Satin

7. (C7): SW #6683, “Bee”, Gloss

8. (C8): SW #6991, “Black Magic”, Semi-Gloss

9. (C9): SW #7055, “Enduring Bronze”, Semi-Gloss

Color to match Face Brick (FBR1) color, refer to Section 04810.

10. (C10): SW #6117, “Smoky Topaz”, Semi-Gloss

Color to match (EIFS1) color, refer to Section 07240.

11. (C11): SW #7055, “Enduring Bronze”, Semi-Gloss Epoxy.

12. (C12): SW #7006, “Extra White”, Semi-Gloss Epoxy

13. (C13): SW #6898, “Social Butterfly”, Satin, Color match for (EIFS2).

14. (C14): Clear Finish, Polyurethane Satin, Wood Doors.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one

another, with factory-applied primers and with the substrates indicated under conditions of

service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's specified paint material of the various coating types

that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint

material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not acceptable.

04-27-11 PAINTS AND COATINGS

09900 -3


Buffalo Wild Wings

C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:

1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the

following:

a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings.

2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,

Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added

at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.04 MIXING

A. Mix and thin materials according to manufacturer's instructions without modification. Use

premixed paints insofar as possible. Thin only as permitted by manufacturer's label instructions,

and avoid unnecessary thinning.

B. Primer Tint: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when

multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish

coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Accessory Materials: Sealers, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically

indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.

C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present,

for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in

PDCA P4.

1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and

surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly clean and dry.

2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions

within a particular area.

B. Coordination of Work: Examine factory finished and primed surfaces to be painted, and verify

compatibility of existing material with paint to be applied.

1. Report incompatible or unsuitable materials immediately that may potentially affect proper

application.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Protect surfaces not being painted concurrently, or surfaces not to be painted,

property of Owner, and finished Work of other trades.

1. Remove device plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and similar removable

items before painting. Reinstall items after final coat of paint has dried.

2. Apply masking over UL labels and other items that cannot be removed before painting

surface.

3. Cover floors and fixed equipment with drop cloths.

4. Remove protective coverings and masking when painting of surfaces is complete.

3.03 PREPARATION OF NEW SURFACES

A. General:

1. Clean and prepare surfaces according to paint manufacturer's written instructions for

specific substrate.

04-27-11 PAINTS AND COATINGS

09900 -4


Buffalo Wild Wings

2. Mildew Removal: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate

and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

3. Apply paint only to surfaces which are thoroughly dry, clean, and free of dust and properly

prepared to receive intended finish.

B. Concrete: Remove dirt, scale, powder, laitance, parting compounds, oil and grease. For cast-inplace

work, allow at least 14 days (after forms are removed) before starting work.

1. Removal of stains caused by weathering or corroding metals: Wash with sodium

metasilicate solution after thoroughly wetting with potable water and allow to dry. Remove

oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry.

2. Filling surface pock marks and air holes: Fill with an approved exterior latex base prime

and fill material. Thoroughly brush or rub over surface. Let dry for not less than 24 hours

before painting.

3. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds

that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Concrete Masonry Units: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, efflorescence or powder.

1. Removal of stains caused by weathering or corroding metals: Wash with sodium

metasilicate solution after thoroughly wetting with potable water and allow to dry.

2. Thoroughly brush or rub specified block filler over concrete masonry units to fill all pock

marks, air holes and other surface imperfections. Rub excess filler off surfaces and allow

filler to dry for not less than 24 hours before painting.

3. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds

that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Unprimed Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, rust, and other

foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's

recommendations. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or

sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Immediately apply prime coat.

E. Shop Primed Steel and Iron Surfaces: Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that

have been damaged. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make

touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.

F. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated

from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote

adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

G. Aluminum: Remove surface contamination by steam, high pressure water, or solvent washing.

Apply specified primer.

H. Fiber Cement Siding and Trim: Sand factory primed surfaces, as necessary to remove surface

defects. Wipe off surfaces to remove dust and dirt.

1. Fill voids and nail holes with putty after installation. Sand filler smooth, level with surface.

2. Prime cut edges and cutouts with specified primer. Touch-up bare spots in factory primer

as necessary.

I. Wood Products to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and minor grit prior to prime and

subsequent coats. Spot coat knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Prior to its

installation, apply backprime to exterior and interior woodwork as specified. Fill nail holes and

fine cracks after primer has dried, sand filler smooth, level with surface.

J. Wood Products to Receive Clear Finish: Sand, as necessary to remove surface defects, and

remove dust.

1. After stain is applied, set and fill exposed fastener heads with matching color filler. Sand

smooth and level with surface, when dry.

2. Back-prime non-exposed surfaces with sealer.

3. Note: Seal top and bottom edges of wood doors with 2 coats of sealer.

04-27-11 PAINTS AND COATINGS

09900 -5


Buffalo Wild Wings

K. Gypsum Wallboard: Fill minor irregularities in gypsum board surface with joint compound. Sand

smooth, level with surface, when dry. Avoid raising nap of paper. Remove dust prior to painting.

L. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Prepare metal surfaces as specified for steel, galvanized

metal, aluminum, as applicable to type of material scheduled to be painted.

3.04 APPLICATION

A. Apply materials according to manufacturer's instructions. Apply each coat at rate recommended

by manufacturer for the type of surface and with a dry film thickness not less than that

recommended.

B. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. If undercoats or other conditions show through

topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is

applied.

D. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior

to applying next coat.

3.05 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished.

1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts,

hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment

occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas.

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, and leave in an undamaged

condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

3.07 PAINTING SCHEDULES - GENERAL

A. Painting schedules outline the primary paint systems required. For substrates and conditions

not scheduled, provide paint systems recommended by paint manufacturers. Submit proposed

paint material product data for approval.

B. Location and colors related to paint systems specified herein are indicated on Drawings.

C. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:

1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted.

2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels.

04-27-11 PAINTS AND COATINGS

09900 -6


Buffalo Wild Wings

3.08 PAINT SYSTEMS SCHEDULE Indicated as (PS#)

EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS

PS-1: Concrete and Concrete Block; Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish.

Primer: 1 coat, SW: “Loxon” Block Surfacer, A24W200.

Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial High-Bild Catalyzed Epoxy, Semi-Gloss, B71 Series.

PS-2: Fiber Cement Siding; Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish.

Primer: 1 coat, SW: “Loxon” Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24W8300.

Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial High-Bild Catalyzed Epoxy, Semi-Gloss, B71 Series.

PS-3: Fiber Cement Siding; Satin Finish.

Primer: 1 coat, SW: “Loxon” Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24W8300.

Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic, Eg-Shel, B66-660.

PS-4: Steel / Galvanized Steel; Semi-Gloss Finish.

Primer: 1 coat, SW: Pro Industrial “Pro-Cryl” Universal Primer, B66-310.

Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic, Semi-Gloss, B66-650.

PS-5: Steel / Galvanized Steel; Gloss Finish.

Primer: 1 coat, SW: Pro Industrial “Pro-Cryl” Universal Primer, B66-310.

Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic, Gloss, B66-600.

PS-6: Steel / Galvanized Steel; Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish.

Primer: 1 coat, Pro Industrial “Pro-Cryl” Universal Primer, B66-310.

Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial High-Bild Catalyzed Epoxy, Semi-Gloss, B71 Series.

PS-7: Exterior Wood Sheathing; Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish.

Primer: 1 coat, SW: Multi-Purpose Latex Primer, B51-8000.

Finish: 2 coat, SW: Pro Industrial High-Bild Catalyzed Epoxy, Semi-Gloss, B71 Series.

Exterior Paint System Notes:

1. Gas Piping: Paint exterior gas piping that runs on face of walls or exposed to view, the

color of the surrounding substrate. Paint gas piping on roof, (C7) “Bee” unless local

code requires another color.

INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS

PS-15: Gypsum Board; Satin Finish.

Primer: 1 coat, ProMar 200 Interior Latex Primer, B28W8200.

Finish: 2 coats, SW: ColorAccents Interior Latex Satin, Y38T-154.

PS-16: HM Frames and Doors; Satin Finish.

Primer: 1 coat, Pro Industrial “Pro-Cryl” Universal Primer, B66-310.

Finish: 2 coats, SW: ColorAccents Interior Latex Satin, Y38T-154.

PS-17: Steel, Dry Fall, Flat Finish.

Primer: 1 coat, SW: Pro Industrial “Pro-Cryl” Universal Primer, B66-310.

Finish: 2 coats, SW: Low VOC Waterborne Acrylic Dry Fall, Flat Back, B42B00081.

PS-18: Wood, Paint, Satin Finish.

Primer: 1 coat, SW: Multi-Purpose Latex Primer, B51-8000.

Finish: 2 coats, SW: ColorAccents Interior Latex Satin, Y38T-154.

PS-19: Wood, Clear, Satin Finish.

Finish: 3 coats, Minwax: “Polycrylic” Water-Based Protective Finish, Satin.

END OF SECTION

04-27-11 PAINTS AND COATINGS

09900 -7


Buffalo Wild Wings

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

SECTION 09960 - FIELD APPLIED HIGH PERFORMACE COATING

A. Field Applied, High Performance Paint System.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA):

1. AAMA 2605: Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

Superior Performing High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and

Panels.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM D1400: Standard Test Method for Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film

Thickness of Nonconductive Coatings Applied to a Nonferrous Metal Base.

2. ASTM D1654: Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens

Subjected to Corrosive Environments.

3. ASTM D2244: Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences

from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.

4. ASTM D4214: Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior

Paint Films.

C. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):

1. SSPC-SP 1: Joint Surface Preparation Standard SSPC-SP 1: Solvent Cleaning.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Air dried, fluoropolymer paint system, field applied over an existing aluminum storefront and

doors.

1. System to include labor and materials for surface cleaning, preparation, and application of

the field applied high performance paint system.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's published product data on all exterior coating products

including physical properties and performance characteristics.

B. Samples for Verification: For field applied paint system in color and gloss of finish coat

indicated.

1. Submit (2) samples approximately 4” x 6” on aluminum substrate.

C. Manufacturer's Application Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures, and

substrate conditions requiring special attention.

D. Manufacturer's maintenance instructions.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Exterior coating materials shall be applied evenly in accordance with manufacturer's directions

and written specifications.

1. Finish surfaces to conform to AAMA 2605, 4.2. "Coating shall be visibly free from flow

lines, streaks, blisters or other surface imperfections in the dry-film state on exposed

surfaces when observed at a distance of 10 feet from the metal surface and inspected at

an angle of 90 degrees to the surface".

2. The coating shall be applied to meet the dry-film thickness specification of the

manufacturer and per AAMA 2605, 4.3.

B. All work is subject to acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor will be required to correct Work

that does not comply with the specifications and the Manufacturer’s requirements.

04-27-11 FIELD APPLIED HIGH PERFORMACE COATING

09960 -1


Buffalo Wild Wings

A. Applicator Qualifications: Coating manufacturer's approved Applicator who is equipped and

trained for application of the specified coating system required for this Project, with a record of

successful in-service performance.

1. Pre-qualified Applicator: Stuart Dean Company, Inc. www.stuartdean.com

2. Other proposed applicators for the work of this section must submit a successful record of

completion for projects of the same scale and nature, including the type of coating system

specified herein, to be considered qualified for approval.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable federal, state, and local regulatory requirements.

B. Products must meet current local and federal VOC requirements.

C. Flammable Liquids: Observe regulations regarding flammable liquids such as posting "No

Smoking" signs. Allow no open flames, welding, or other ignition sources in the work area.

D. Conform to all applicable laws, codes, and regulations for disposal of all materials, debris, and

containers.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site in Manufacturer's original sealed containers with labels intact and

legible.

1. Container labels shall include manufacturer's name, type of material, brand name, lot

number, brand code and color designation.

B. Store materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45° F and a maximum of 90° F, in

ventilated area and as required by manufacturer's storage instructions.

1. Store flammable materials to protect from fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.

C. Remove all materials and empty containers from the area of work at the close of each day.

1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply coatings to wet or damp surfaces, or when relative humidity is outside the range

required by the product manufacturer or when rain is imminent.

B. Minimum Application Temperatures: 50° F. unless required otherwise by manufacturer's

instructions. Minimum temperature to be maintained at a minimum of 24 hours prior to and 48

hours following application.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Coating Warranty: Coating Applicator's warranty in which Applicator agrees to repair finish or

replace coated items that demonstrate deterioration of field applied finish within warranty period

indicated.

1. Exposed Coating: Deterioration includes but is not limited to:

a. Color fading in excess of 5 Delta E Hunter units per ASTM D 2244.

b. Peeling, checking, or cracking of coating adhesion to metal.

c. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 per ASTM D 4214, when tested per Method D 659.

d. Corrosion of substrate in excess of a No. 6 on cut edges and a No. 8 on field

surfaces, when measured per ASTM D 1654.

2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: PPG Industries, Inc. www.coraflon.com

04-27-11 FIELD APPLIED HIGH PERFORMACE COATING

09960 -2


Buffalo Wild Wings

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Fluoropolymer Coating, AAMA 2605: Field applied, two component fluoropolymer finish

consisting of a 100 percent FEVE resin component and an aliphatic isocyanate curing agent